Seat Exeo ST 2010 Owner’s Manual PDF
en
Summary of Content for Seat Exeo ST 2010 Owner’s Manual PDF
EX EO
S T
O W
N ER
S M
A N
U A
L
In gl
s 3
R9 01
20 03
A M
(0 7.
10 )
( G
T9 )
EX EO
S T
In gl
s (
07 .1
0)
3R 90
12 00
3A M
Portada EXEO ST.qxd:Maquetacin 1 23/7/10 08:38 Pgina 3
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.10
Portada EXEO ST_interior.qxd:maquetacin 23/7/10 08:37 Pgina 3
efully to familiarise yourself with
ill help preserve its value.
s and part replacements.
, as it should be kept with the
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 1 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Foreword This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read car
your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling w
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner
vehicle.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 2 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Contents 3
river seat memory* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ead restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rmrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
oof rack / roof rails* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
shtray*, cigarette lighter* and electric sockets*
ompartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
onditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
teering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
arking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
utomatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ctical Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lectronic Stability Programme (ESP) . . . . . . . .
rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ower steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ervotronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
140
142
143
151
153
154
159
162
162
172
172
172
173
174
176
177
180
183
183
191
191
191
194
196
196
197
197
198
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 3 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Contents
Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed warning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and storage compartments . . . . . . . . . .
Manual adjustment of the front seats . . . . . . . .
Electric adjustment of front seats* . . . . . . . . . . .
Lumbar support* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D
H
A
L
R
D
A
C
Air c
2
Driv
S
S
Ig
S
H
P
C
M
A
Pra
Inte
E
B
P
S
Driv
R
E
5
6
7
7
7
10
15
16
18
18
19
22
26
28
28
32
35
38
41
44
46
46
48
51
57
57
57
59
65
71
75
82
85
87
89
91
91
96
96
98
103
104
105
107
109
112
116
116
124
127
128
131
134
134
136
137
Contents4
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 4 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle exterior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, parts replacement and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . .
Athermic windscreen* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repairs* (Tyre Mobility System) . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing bulbs. Halogen headlights . . . . . . . .
Changing bulbs. Bi-Xenon AFS headlights . . . .
Changing tail light bulbs (on side panel) . . . . .
Changing tail light bulbs (on tailgate) . . . . . . . .
Side turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visor light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Description of specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.8 88 kW (120 PS) . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 147 kW (200 PS) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (210 PS) . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 88 kW (120 PS) . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS) . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS) . . . .
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
199
201
203
203
206
214
214
215
220
223
223
223
224
224
225
225
226
227
228
230
233
236
240
241
245
245
254
254
257
262
265
267
267
274
280
285
288
289
290
291
291
294
297
297
297
299
299
300
301
301
302
303
304
305
307
308
309
311
313
Manual structure 5
Manual structure What you should know before reading this manual This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the
vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will
not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.
As this is a general manual for the EXEO ST, some of the equipment and func- tions described in this manual are not included in all types or versions of the model. These may vary or be modified depending on technical and market requirements, which can in no way be interpreted as deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk** is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol
does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
The section is continued on the following page.
Marks the end of a section.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn you about possible dangers of accident or injury.
Caution Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to
your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information on the protec-
tion of the environment.
Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 5 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Content6
Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised
way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to
chapters(e.g.Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large
parts which are:
1. Safety first Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Operating instructions Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-
able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Practical tips Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and
certain problems you can solve yourself.
4. Technical Specifications Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 6 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Safe driving 7
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
isted here are part of the vehicle's
tem. They work together to help
in a wide variety of accident situa-
our passengers should not be left to chance. In
safety features incorporated in your vehicle are
f injury. These are just a few of the safety
timised for all seats
seats
e front seat belts
nd rear seat backrests*
drive only
ISOFIX child safety seats on the outer rear seats
straints
n
res are harmonised to provide you and your
sible protection in case of an accident. However,
ou and your passengers sit in the correct posi-
afety equipment properly.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 7 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety
and for your passengers' safety.
WARNING
This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the owner's manual also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment l
passenger restraint sys
reduce the risk of injury
tions.
Your safety and the safety of y
the event of an accident, the
capable of reducing the risk o
features in your SEAT:
Three-point seat belts op
Belt force limiters for the
Belt tension devices for th
Front airbags
Side airbags in the front a
Head-protection airbags*
Knee airbag for left-hand
ISOFIX anchor points* for
Height-adjustable head re
Adjustable steering colum
These individual safety featu
passengers with the best pos
they can only be effective if y
tion and adjust and use the s
Safe driving8
. Inform your passengers as to how they
rrectly. Make sure that your passengers
8.
g?
ctly related to how you drive, and can
assengers in the vehicle.
r the safety of the vehicle and all its occu-
e is impaired in any way, you endanger
ers . Therefore:
istracted by passengers or by using a
riving ability is impaired (by medication,
ns and speed limits and always maintain
ehicle in front.
ed to suit the road, traffic and weather
long trips. Do not drive for more than two
g when you are tired or stressed.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 8 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Therefore, this chapter explains why these safety features are so important,
how they can protect you, what you need to remember when using them and
how you and your passengers can gain the most benefit from them. There are
also a number of important safety warnings that you and your passengers
should always observe in order to minimise the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's responsibility!
Before setting off
The driver is responsible for the safety of the passengers and
the safe operation of the vehicle at all times.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before setting off:
Make sure that all lights and indicators are working properly.
Check tyre pressure.
Make sure that all windows are clean and give good visibility to
the outside.
Secure all luggage and other items carefully page 16.
Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
Adjust the front seat, head restraint and mirrors correctly.
Make sure that the head restraints for all passengers are
adjusted to the correct position.
Make sure that children are protected with suitable safety seats
and properly worn seat belts page 46.
Sit in a correct position
should sit page 10.
Fasten your seat belt co
do the same page 1
What affects safe drivin
Safety on the road is dire
also be affected by the p
The driver is responsible fo
pants. If your ability to driv
yourself and other road us
Do not let yourself be d
mobile phone, etc.
Never drive when your d
alcohol, drugs, etc.).
Obey all traffic regulatio
a safe distance to the v
Always adjust your spe
conditions.
Take frequent breaks on
hours without a stop.
If possible, avoid drivin
Safe driving 9
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 9 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.
What affects driving safety?
Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and
the personal behaviour of all occupants.
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.
When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any circum-
stance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road ,
for this reason:
Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by
passengers or telephone calls.
Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
tion, alcohol, drugs).
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impa dents increases.
Safe driving10
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
he following adjustments for the driver:
el so that there is a distance of at least 25
g wheel and the centre of your chest
rwards or backwards so that you are able
, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
angled .
ch the highest point of the steering
nt so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
head fig. 2.
upright position so that your backrests
Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 10 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a
safe and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend t
Adjust the steering whe
cm between the steerin
fig. 1.
Move the driver seat fo
to press the accelerator
your knees still slightly
Ensure that you can rea
wheel.
Adjust the head restrai
level as the top of your
level as the top of your
Move the backrest to an
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel
Safe driving 11
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
for front passenger
st sit at least 25 cm away from the
airbag can provide the greatest
he event that it is triggered.
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
the following adjustments for the front
ger seat back as far as possible .
n upright position so that your backrests
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
r head page 13.
otwell in front of the front passenger seat.
ecurely page 18.
e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
r seat page 134.
tion of the front passenger can lead to severe
er seat so that there is at least 25 cm between el. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the t you properly.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 11 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Fasten your seat belt securely page 18.
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver seat page 134.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The work- shop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position
The front passenger mu
dash panel so that the
possible protection in t
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend
passenger:
Move the front passen
Move the backrest to a
completely against it.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
Keep both feet in the fo
Fasten your seat belt s
It is possible to deactivate th
stances page 23.
Adjusting the front passenge
WARNING
An incorrect sitting posi injuries.
Adjust the front passeng your chest and the dash pan airbag system cannot protec
Safe driving12
otwell in front of the rear seat.
curely page 18.
d restraint system when you take children
6.
ear seat are not sitting properly, they could
properly in order to achieve maximum protec-
e optimal protection when backrests are in an engers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the seat belt increases.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 12 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The work- shop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet on the footwells, have the head restraints positioned for
use and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
consider the following:
Adjust the head restraint to the correct position page 14.
Keep both feet in the fo
Fasten your seat belt se
Use an appropriate chil
in the vehicle page 4
WARNING
If the passengers on the r sustain severe injuries.
Adjust the head restraint tion.
Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pass If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos
WARNING (continued)
Safe driving 13
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
properly in order to achieve maximum
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head or as close as possible to the same
r head and, at the very least, at eye level
page 134.
restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.
d restraints could result in death in the event of
d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.
t always be adjusted according to the
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 13 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint
protection.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
fig. 3 and fig. 4
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe
Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte
The head restraints mus passenger's height.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side
Safe driving14
t in its guides until it clicks into place.
wer the head restraint.
hould the rear passengers travel while the -use position.
ar head restraint with either of the outer seat
n accident!
djustment of the head restraints page 13.
itting positions
tion can lead to severe injuries to
imal protection only when the belt webs
correct sitting positions substantially
tion of seat belts and increase the risk of
t belt position. As the driver, you are
occupants, especially children.
ssume an incorrect sitting position in the
.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 14 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of the
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations
Raising the head restraint
Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.
Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Lowering the head restraint
Press button fig. 5 and lower the head restraint.
Removing the head restraint
Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Press button fig. 5 and pull out the head restraint.
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restrain
Press button and lo
WARNING
Under no circumstances s head restraints are in the non
Do not swap the centre re rear head restraints.
Risk of injury in case of a
Caution Note the instructions on the a
Examples of incorrect s
An incorrect sitting posi
occupants.
Seat belts can provide opt
are properly positioned. In
reduce the protective func
injury due to incorrect sea
responsible for all vehicle
Never allow anyone to a
vehicle while travelling
Fig. 5 Outer rear seats: Head restraints
AA
AA
AA
Safe driving 15
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
als must never be impaired by objects
ways press the accelerator, brake and
red to the floor.
can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
ve the pedal area free and can be securely
ke pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in
port your feet properly and give you a good
ion can lead to critical situations while driving.
e driver footwell. An object could move into dal operation. In the event of a sudden driving ill not be able to operate the brake, clutch or
cident!
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 15 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be
dangerous for all occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to
make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
Never stand in the vehicle,
never stand on the seats,
never kneel on the seats,
never tilt your backrest far to the rear,
never lean against the dash panel,
never lie on the rear bench,
never sit on the front edge of a seat,
never sit sideways,
never lean out of a window,
never put your feet out of a window,
never put your feet on the dash panel,
never put your feet on the surface of a seat,
do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell,
never travel without wearing the seat belt,
do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incor- rect sitting position.
Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation of all ped
or floor mats.
Ensure that you can al
clutch pedals unimpai
Ensure that the pedals
tions.
Use only floor mats which lea
fastened on the footwell.
If a brake circuit fails, the bra
order to stop the vehicle.
Wearing suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which sup
feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
Restricting pedal operat
Never place objects on th the pedal area and impair pe or braking manoeuvre, you w accelerator pedal. Risk of ac
Safe driving16
ly in the luggage compartment.
gage as far forward as possible in the
low as possible in the luggage compart-
the fitted fastening rings page 17.
objects in the luggage compartment could
e luggage compartment and secure them on
ure heavy objects.
es or accidents, loose objects can be thrown pants or passers-by. This increased risk of d if a loose object is struck by an inflating
ts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of
re of gravity may shift when transporting t the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- l to adjust your speed and driving style ts.
axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If llowed total weight is exceeded, the driving
may change, leading to accidents, injuries
nattended, especially when the tailgate is to the luggage compartment, closing the door pped and run the risk of death.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 16 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Floor mats on the driver side
Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened
in the footwell and do not impair operation of the pedals.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip
and do not obstruct the pedals .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to
prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a special-
ised dealership.
WARNING
If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju- ries.
Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.
Storing objects
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
Distribute the load even
Lay and stow heavy lug
luggage compartment.
Stow heavy luggage as
ment.
Secure heavy objects to
WARNING
Loose luggage and other cause serious injuries.
Always stow objects in th the fastening rings.
Use suitable straps to sec
During sudden manoeuvr forward, injuring vehicle occu injury will be further increase airbag. If this happens, objec fatal injury.
Please note that the cent heavy objects; this may affec dent. Therefore, it is essentia accordingly, to avoid acciden
Never exceed the allowed the allowed axle load or the a characteristics of the vehicle and damage to the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle u open. Children could climb in behind them; they will be tra
Safe driving 17
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During
of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-
ht. That means that the effective weight of the
kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries
his object strikes an occupant as it flies through
This increased risk of injury will be further
struck by an inflating airbag.
her objects are secured to the fastening rings ed retaining cords, injuries could be sustained euvres or accidents.
age or other objects from flying forward, ining cords which are secured to the fastening
t on the fastening rings.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 17 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and tailgate when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.
Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. All passen- gers must have their seat belt fastened page 18.
Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings
There can be four fastening rings in the luggage compart-
ment for fastening luggage and other objects.
Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the
luggage compartment on page 16.
Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic
energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object. The
most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
Example: An object weighing
a frontal collision at a speed
sponding to 20 times its weig
object increases to about 90
which might be sustained if t
the passenger compartment.
increased if a loose object is
WARNING
If pieces of luggage or ot with inappropriate or damag in the event of braking mano
To prevent pieces of lugg always use appropriate reta rings.
Never secure a child sea
WARNING (continued)
Seat belts18
is approved only for four seats. Two front seats
le seats must never be transported in your
hicle must properly fasten and wear the seat at. Children must be protected with an appro-
*
s a reminder to the driver to fasten
:
curely.
s to fasten their seat belts properly before
g a child seat according to the child's
, the warning lamp will remain lit until the
applicable) have fastened their seat belts.
a certain speed, you will also hear a warning
ill flash.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 18 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Seat belts
Brief introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!
In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,
how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases.
Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen- gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.
Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju- ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is
equipped with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle
and two rear seats.
WARNING
More people than availab vehicle.
Every passenger in the ve belt belonging to his or her se priate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp
The warning lamp acts a
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle
Fasten your seat belt se
Instruct your passenger
driving off.
Protect children by usin
height and weight.
After switching on the ignition
driver and front passenger (if
When the vehicle has reached
signal and the warning light w
Seat belts 19
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
aws of physics work in the case of a head-on
rts moving fig. 6, a certain amount of energy
oduced in the vehicle and its occupants.
depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
passengers. The higher the speed and the
energy there is to be released in an accident.
owever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
km/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-
ur example are not restrained by seat belts, in
n all of their kinetic energy has to be absorbed
7.
50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
nne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a
ove forward at the same speed their vehicle was
Fig. 7 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 19 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Why wear seat belts?
Physical principles of frontal collisions
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy must be absorbed.
It is easy to explain how the l
collision: When a vehicle sta
known as kinetic energy is pr
The amount of kinetic energy
weight of the vehicle and its
greater the weight, the more
The most significant factor, h
doubles from 25 km/h to 50
plied by four.
Because the passengers in o
the case of a head-on collisio
at the point of impact fig.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to
sion can easily exceed one to
even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat
head-on collision, they will m
Fig. 6 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts
Seat belts20
acting on the body in a collision are so great
oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,
wn forward and will make violent contact with
l, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
stitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags
tion. All occupants (including the driver) must
g the trip. This will reduce the risk of severe
dent regardless of whether an airbag is fitted
ered only once. To achieve the best possible
always be worn properly so that you will be
h no airbag is deployed.
passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
ward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
anger not only themselves but also the front
Fig. 9 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 20 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on
collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
The general belief that the passengers can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.
Even at low speeds the forces
that it is not possible to brace
unbelted passengers are thro
the steering wheel, dash pane
fig. 8.
The airbag system is not a sub
provide only additional protec
wear seat belts properly durin
injuries in the event of an acci
for the seat or not.
Note that airbags can be trigg
protection, the seat belt must
protected in accidents in whic
It is also important for the rear
could otherwise be thrown for
who do not use seat belts end
occupants fig. 9.
Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.
Seat belts 21
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
n seat belts before every trip, even when "just
wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
t belts is an effective means of substantially
d improving the chances of survival in a serious
rly worn seat belts improve the protection
ent of an accident. For this reason, wearing a
most countries.
pped with airbags, the seat belts must be
airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
irbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
ns, rear collisions, overturns or accidents in
hold value in the control unit is not exceeded.
wear your seat belt and ensure that your
eir seat belts properly before you drive off!
using seat belts
rrectly, they can reduce the risk of
elt as described in this section.
lts can be fastened at all times and are not
incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 21 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Seat belt protection
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the vehicle.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of
injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to faste
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers
have shown that wearing sea
reducing the risk of injury an
accident. Furthermore, prope
provided by airbags in the ev
seat belt is required by law in
Although your vehicle is equi
fastened and worn. The front
frontal accidents. The front a
collisions, minor side collisio
which the airbag trigger thres
Therefore, you should always
passengers have fastened th
Safety instructions on
If seat belts are used co
injury in an accident.
Always wear the seat b
Ensure that the seat be
damaged.
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.
Fig. 10 A driver wearing the seat belt properly is secured by the belt in sharp braking
Seat belts22
damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.
ean, otherwise the retractors may not work
nt and rear occupants are locked into
its full protection if the seat belt is not
Fig. 11 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 22 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The other passengers must also wear the seat belts at all times, otherwise they run the risk of being injured.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not posi- tioned correctly.
Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
Keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.
The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.
Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod
The belts must be kept cl properly page 221.
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the fro
position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Seat belts 23
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ximum protection only when they are
Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front
Fig. 13 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 23 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
Insert the latch into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push
it down until it is securely locked with a click page 22, fig. 11.
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in steep areas or
bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt
is locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt
tensioners page 26.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned seat belt can cause extremely severe injuries.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their ma
properly positioned.
Seat belts24
lso fasten their seat belts properly
he unborn child is for the mother to
rly at all times during the pregnancy.
imum protection only when the seat belt
age 23.
d head restraint correctly page 10.
pull the belt evenly across your chest and
the pelvis fig. 14.
o the buckle for the appropriate seat and
securely locked with a click .
hat the latch plate is securely engaged in
Fig. 14 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 24 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
belt height adjustment for the front seats.
front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 23, fig. 12.
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 23, fig. 13. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Read and observe the warnings page 21.
Pregnant women must a
The best protection for t
wear the seat belt prope
The seat belt provides max
is properly positioned p
Adjust the front seat an
Holding the latch plate,
as low as possible over
Insert the latch plate int
push it down until it is
Pull the belt to ensure t
the buckle.
Seat belts 25
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim
hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you ng severe or fatal injuries.
ment
rs can be used to adjust the height of
e seat belt.
an be lowered by keeping the button
e time.
to adjust the belt height.
Fig. 16 Belt height adjuster
A1
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 25 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
Read and observe the warnings page 21.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 15. The latch plate
is released and springs out .
Guide the belt back by
is not damaged
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustaini
Seat belt height adjust
Seat belt height adjuste
the shoulder area of th
The belt height adjuster c
pressed down at the sam
Press button fig. 16
Fig. 15 Removing latch plate from buckle
Seat belts26
elt increases the risk of severe injuries.
your passengers to adjust their seat belts r the whole journey.
information and warnings concerning the use
rs
t tensioner
, the seat belts on the front seats are
upants are equipped with belt tensioners.
nsioners during severe head-on, lateral and
elt is being worn. This retracts and tightens the
rd motion of the occupants.
triggered only once.
ot be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
hicle overturns or in situations where no large
rear of the vehicle.
are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
ion of fire in the vehicle.
ments must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. Specialised workshops are familiar
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 26 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Take hold of the top guide fitting and slide it up or down so that
the shoulder part of the seat belt is positioned roughly midway
over the shoulder, although it must never rest against the neck
page 25, fig. 16 in Seat belt position on page 23.
After adjusting, pull the belt sharply to check that the catch on
the guide fitting is engaged securely.
Note It is also possible to adjust the height of the front seats to obtain the best
position for the front seat belts.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal
injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs
substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe
or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially
increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has
assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are respon-
sible for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the
vehicle is moving .
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat b
Before every trip, instruct properly and to wear them fo
Read and always observe of seat belts page 21.
Seat belt tensione
Function of the seat bel
During a frontal collision
retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the front occ
Sensors will trigger the belt te
rear collisions only if the seat b
seat belts, reducing the forwa
The seat belt tensioner can be
The seat belt tensioners will n
side or rear collision, if the ve
forces act on the front, side or
Note If the seat belt tensioners
normal and it is not an indicat
The relevant safety require
components of the system are
A2
Seat belts 27
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 27 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
with these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to
you.
Service and disposal of belt tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the
seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install
parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be
damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt
tensioners function incorrectly or not at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat belts.
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and automatic retractor cannot be repaired.
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.
The belt tensioners will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed if they have been activated.
Airbag system28
critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This
possible distance between yourself and the
t airbags can completely deploy when trig-
m protection.
at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
d the speed of the vehicle.
red depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ollision and detected by the control unit. If the
during the collision and measured by the
specified reference values, the front, side
be triggered. Take into account that the visible
in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a
ags to have been triggered.
orrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- al injuries.
hildren, who are not properly belted can s if the airbag is triggered. Children up to 12 l on the rear seat. Never transport children in trained or the restraint system is not appro- eight.
at belt, if you lean forward or to the side while rect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury will be further an inflating airbag.
y from an inflating airbag, always wear the .
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 28 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before driving:
Always wear the seat belt properly page 18.
Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly
page 10.
Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.
Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.
Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle page 46.
The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an
incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause
you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle
assume a correct sitting position while travelling.
A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat
belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,
the inflating airbag may inflict
also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest
front airbag. This way, the fron
gered, providing their maximu
The most important factors th
dent, the angle of collision an
Whether the airbags are trigge
ation rate resulting from the c
vehicle deceleration occurring
control unit remains below the
and/or curtain airbag will not
damage in a vehicle involved
determining factor for the airb
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt inc tion can lead to critical or fat
All occupants, including c sustain critical or fatal injurie years old should always trave the vehicle if they are not res priate for their age, size or w
If you are not wearing a se travelling or assume an incor increased risk of injury. This increased if you are struck by
To reduce the risk of injur seat belt properly page 18
Airbag system 29
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat gainst the door, the roof or the backrest.
tances, it is necessary to transport a child in a front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential ng safety measures:
assenger airbag page 44, Deactivating
e approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.
instructions given by the child seat manufac- fety instructions page 46, Child safety.
ling the child seat, push the front passenger rds so that the greatest possible distance to ag is ensured.
prevent the front passenger seat from being .
nt passenger seat must be in an upright
g and seat belt tensioner
itors the airbag and seat belt
ll airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehicle,
iring connections.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 29 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Always adjust the front seats properly.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
The front passenger airbag is a serious risk for a child if it is activated. The
front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if he/she is transported in a
rear-facing child seat. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the
rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such force that it can cause critical or fatal injuries.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.
That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front
passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 44.
When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size
of each child page 46.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to disconnect the
airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.
WARNING
If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries if the front passenger airbag is triggered.
An inflating front passen and hurl it with great force a
If, under special circums rear-facing child seat on the that you observe the followi
Deactivate the front p airbags.
The child seat must b use on a front passenger
Follow the installation turer and observe the sa
Before properly instal seat completely backwa the front passenger airb
Ensure that no objects pushed completely back
The backrest of the fro position.
Warning lamp for airba
This warning lamp mon
tensioner system.
The warning lamp monitors a
including control units and w
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Airbag system30
nts must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. Specialised workshops and vehicle
ith these requirements.
ut by a professional, or if the airbags are used or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may in the wrong circumstances.
hing on the steering wheel hub or the surface enger side of the dash panel, and do not
ny way.
ch any objects such as cup holders or tele- aces covering the airbag units.
el or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a r clean the dash panel and the airbag module ing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to
triggered, plastic parts could become
djust, remove or install parts of the airbag
stem or removal and installation of the airbag (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should fied workshop. Qualified workshops have the
ation and qualified personnel.
ou to go to a qualified workshop for all work
front bumper or the body.
ction for just one accident; replace them once
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 30 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly monitored
electronically. The warning lamp will light every time the ignition is
switched on until you attach your seatbelt.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp :
does not light up when the ignition is switched on,
turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,
lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously.
Have the system inspected immediately by a qualified workshop.
If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the
indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off
if there is no fault.
WARNING
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot properly perform its protective function.
If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.
Repairs, maintenance and disposal of airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle.
If work is carried out on the airbag system or parts have to be removed and
fitted on the system when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag
system may be damaged. In the event of an accident this could cause the
airbag to inflate incorrectly or not inflate at all.
The relevant safety requireme
components of the airbag are
disposal centres are familiar w
WARNING
If repairs are not carried o incorrectly, the risk of severe fail to inflate, or could inflate
Do not cover or stick anyt of the airbag unit on the pass obstruct or modify them in a
It is important not to atta phone mountings to the surf
To clean the steering whe water-moistened cloth. Neve surface with cleaners contain become porous. If the airbag detached and cause injuries.
Never attempt to repair, a system.
Any work on the airbag sy components for other repairs be performed only by a quali necessary tools, repair inform
We strongly recommend y on the airbag system.
Never attempt to alter the
The airbags provide prote they have deployed.
Airbag system 31
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 31 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
For the sake of the environment The airbags, which are a special type of waste, must be disposed of through
an authorised service, because they contain pyrotechnic elements.
Airbag system32
is located in the steering wheel fig. 17 and
ger is located in the dash panel fig. 18.
ord AIRBAG. On the driver side, the knee
ll lining, under the instrument panel.
elts, the front airbag system gives the front
on for the head and chest in the event of a
e 35, Safety notes on the front airbag system.
ction of restraining the occupants, the seat
ront passenger in a position where the airbags
ion in a frontal collision.
stitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
e safety system. Please bear in mind that the
ffectively when the occupants are wearing their
djusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
e seat belts at all times, not only because this
ntries, but also for your safety page 18,
Fig. 18 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 32 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the driver
the airbag for the front passen
Airbags are identified by the w
airbag* is found in the footwe
In conjunction with the seat b
occupants additional protecti
severe frontal collision pag
In addition to their normal fun
belts also hold the driver and f
can provide maximum protect
The airbag system is not a sub
of the vehicle's overall passiv
airbag system can only work e
seat belts correctly and have a
it is most important to wear th
is required by law in most cou
Brief introduction.
Fig. 17 Driver airbag in the steering wheel and knee airbag in the dash panel
Airbag system 33
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ags
the risk of head or chest injury.
d so that the airbags for the driver and front
severe frontal collision.
e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
d front passenger fig. 19. The fully deployed
movement of the front occupants and help to
e head and the upper part of the body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag. After the collision, the
allow visibility.
rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
Fig. 19 Inflated front airbags
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 33 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The main parts of the front airbag system are:
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front
passenger,
a knee airbag* for the driver,
a warning lamp on the instrument panel page 29
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning
lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the warning lamp :
does not light up when the ignition is switched on page 29
turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,
lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving.
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
the ignition is switched off
there is a minor frontal collision,
there is a side collision,
there is a rear-end collision
the vehicle turns over
WARNING
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of front airb
Inflated airbags reduce
The airbag system is designe
passenger are triggered in a
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered
deploy in front of the driver an
airbags cushion the forward
reduce the risk of injury to th
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant p
chest are surrounded and pro
airbag deflates sufficiently to
The airbags deploy extremely
provide additional protection
Airbag system34
. 20 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags triggered
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 34 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of
fire in the vehicle.
Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver
and front passenger airbags are triggered fig. 20. The airbag covers
remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fig are
Airbag system 35
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
airbag
ides additional protection to front seat
properly secured.
r is located in the dash panel underneath the
onal protection to the driver's knees and upper
pplement to the seat belts.
e knee airbag also deploys in severe frontal
unction, seat belts help keep the driver in posi-
ion so that the airbags can provide protection.
bstitute for seat belts. It is, on the other hand,
afety system of your vehicle. Always remember
Fig. 21 Driver knee airbag
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 35 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Safety notes on the front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.
If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.
The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
Knee airbag*
Description of the knee
The airbag system prov
passengers if they are
The knee airbag for the drive
steering wheel. fig. 21.
The knee airbag offers additi
and lower thigh areas as a su
If the front airbags deploy, th
collisions. page 33
Besides their normal safety f
tion in case of a frontal collis
The airbag system is not a su
part of the overall occupant s
Airbag system36
system can only provide protection when eating position.
ht comes on when the vehicle is being used, mediately by your Authorised Service Centre.
perly when the vehicle acceleration in a side eploy the airbag. See also page 65.
leg area is reduced by fully deployed
en designed so that the airbag for the driver is
frontal collisions.
Fig. 22 Inflated airbags protect in a frontal colli- sion.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 36 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
that the airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your
seat belt and wearing it properly.
Remember too that airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of
accidents - your seat belts are always there to offer protection in those acci-
dents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already
deployed, for example when your vehicle strikes or is struck by another after
the first collision.
This is just one of the reasons why an airbag is not a substitute for the seat
belt. The airbag system works most effectively when used with the seat belts.
Therefore, always wear your seat belts correctly.
It is important to remember that while the airbag system is designed to
reduce the possibility of serious injuries, other injuries, for example,
swelling, bruising, and minor abrasions can also be associated with airbags.
The knee airbag system basically consists of:
The electronic control module
One inflatable airbag (airbag and gas generator) for the driver
An airbag indicator light on the instrument panel
The knee airbag system will not be triggered:
if the ignition is switched off
in frontal collisions when the deceleration measured by the control unit is
too low
in side collisions
in rear-end collisions
in rollovers
in the event of a system malfunction (hazard warning lights/turn signals
illuminated). page 65
WARNING
Seat belts and the airbag occupants are in the proper s
If the airbag indicator lig have the system inspected im The airbag may not work pro collision is high enough to d
How knee airbags work
The risk of injury to the
knee airbags.
The knee airbag system has be
deployed in certain but not all
Airbag system 37
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
keep the upper body and knees at the istances:
est and the steering wheel/dash panel.
ees and the lower part of the dash panel.
ry increases if you lean forward or to the side, ositioned and you are not wearing your seat more should the airbag deploy.
e knee airbag can inflate without interference. d the airbag can increase the risk of injury in
ith the way the airbag deploys or by being deploys.
should be carried in the footwell area in front y objects (shopping bags, for example) can deployment of the airbag. Small objects can ehicle if the airbag deploys and injure you or
racks, deep scratches or other damage in the e the knee airbag is located.
seated, their risk of injury increases in the 46
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 37 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
If the front airbag deploys, the knee airbag also deploys in severe frontal colli-
sions.
When the system is deployed, the airbag starts to fill with a propellant gas,
and inflates between the lower part of the dash panel and the
driver. page 36, fig. 22
Although they are not a soft pillow, they can cushion the impact and in this
way they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the lower extremities.
All this takes place instantaneously, so fast that many people do not even
realise that the airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate with a great
deal of force and it is important for occupant safety that nothing should be in
their way when they deploy.
Fully inflated airbags in combination with properly worn seat belts slow down
and limit the occupant's forward movement and help to reduce the risk of
injury.
Important safety notes on the knee airbag system
Airbags are only additional safety
Always wear seat belts correctly and drive in a proper seated position. There
is a lot of information that you and your passengers should know and do so
that the seat belts and airbags can provide additional protection.
WARNING
An inflating knee airbag can cause serious injuries. Wearing seat belts incorrectly and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used.
The airbag system cannot protect you properly if you are seated too close to any of the airbag locations. When adjusting the seat positions, it
is important for the driver to following minimum safety d
25 cm between the ch
10 cm between the kn
The risk of personal inju or if the seat is improperly p belt. The risk increases even
Always make sure that th Objects between yourself an an accident by interfering w thrust into you as the airbag
No objects of any kind of the driver's seat. Bulk hinder or prevent proper be thrown through the v your passengers.
Make sure there are no c area of the dash panel wher
If children are incorrectly case of an accident. page
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system38
nt seats and the outer rear seats in a position
ovide maximum protection.
stitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
e safety system. Please bear in mind that the
ffectively when the occupants are wearing their
t important to wear the seat belts at all times,
red by law in most countries, but also for your
duction.
t be triggered if:
f
ion
n
ystem are:
onitoring system (control unit)
e backrests of the front seats and the rear side
r wheel housing
instrument panel page 29
s monitored electronically. The airbag warning
seconds every time the ignition is switched on
e airbags will not work, if the sensors do not re increase on the interior of the doors, due to s with holes or openings in the door panel.
the interior panels have been removed.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 38 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front side airbags are located in the driver seat and front passenger seat
backrests fig. 23. The rear side airbags* are located in the rear wheel
housing lining. The locations are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper
region of the backrests and in the rear wheel housing lining.
Together with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat occu-
pants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side
collision page 40, Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag
system.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their
normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
hold the passengers in the fro
where the side airbags can pr
The airbag system is not a sub
of the vehicle's overall passiv
airbag system can only work e
seat belts. Therefore, it is mos
not only because this is requi
safety page 18, Brief intro
The side airbag system will no
the ignition is switched of
there is a minor side collis
there is a frontal collision
there is a rear-end collisio
the vehicle turns over
The main parts of the airbag s
an electronic control and m
The front side airbags in th
airbags in the lining of the rea
a warning lamp on the
The airbag system operation i
lamp will light up for approx. 4
(self-diagnosis).
WARNING
In a side collision, the sid correctly measure the pressu air escaping through the area
Never drive the vehicle if
Fig. 23 Side airbag in driver seat
Airbag system 39
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
gs
uce the risk of head or chest injury in
ions.
ide airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
loys. This is normal and it is not an indication of
shion the movement of the occupants of the
seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the
Fig. 24 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 39 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted.
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been correctly closed.
Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.
Any work carried out to the doors should be made in a specialised work- shop.
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a side collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of side airba
Inflated airbags can red
many side impact collis
In some side collisions, the s
vehicle fig. 24.
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered
The airbags deploy extremely
provide additional protection
develop when the airbag dep
fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cu
front seats and the outer rear
upper body.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system40
eness page 223, Accessories, parts ns.
al seat upholstery or around the seams of the aired immediately by a specialised workshop.
ction for just one accident; replace them once
incorrect sitting position, they expose them- injury in the event of an accident. This is ild is travelling on the front passenger seat gered in an accident; this could have critical us injury or death page 46, Child safety.
ag system or removal and installation of the repairs (such as removal of the front seat) a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may m operation.
components of the airbag system in any way.
s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and rs nor the door panels should be modified in kers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
ly. All work carried out on the front door must hop.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 40 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.
Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously
reducing the airbag's effectiv replacement and modificatio
Any damage to the origin side airbag units must be rep
The airbags provide prote they have deployed.
When children assume an selves to an increased risk of particularly the case if the ch and the airbag system is trig consequences including serio
Any work on the side airb airbag components for other should only be performed by occur during the airbag syste
Do not attempt to modify
The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the doo any way (e.g. fitting loudspea system may not work correct be made in a qualified works
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 41
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
untries, but also for your safety page 18,
airbag system are:
monitoring system (control unit)
gs with gas generator) for the driver, front
n the rear seats,
instrument panel page 29
is monitored electronically.
ll not be triggered if:
ff
n
sion
airbag system, have the system checked imme- hop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a il to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 41 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
fig. 25 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the
curtain airbag system.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most co
Brief introduction.
The main parts of the curtain
an electronic control and
the curtain airbags (airba
passenger and passengers o
a warning lamp on the
The airbag system operation
The curtain airbag system wi
the ignition is switched o
there is a frontal collision
there is a rear-end collisio
the vehicle turns over
there is a minor side colli
WARNING
If a fault has occurred in the diately by a qualified works collision, the system may fa
Fig. 25 Location of head airbags on the left side of the vehicle
Airbag system42
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
ration of the curtain airbag system
tly, they can considerably reduce the
ds of accident.
gs to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts
rtain airbag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.
ersons, animals or objects between the occu- the deployment space of the curtain airbags deploy without restriction and provide the
Therefore, sun blinds which have not been your vehicle may not be attached to the side
ssories, parts replacement and modifica-
ould be used only for lightweight clothing. Do -edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not gers.
ction for just one accident; replace them once
irbag system or removal and installation of her repairs (such as removal of the roof lining)
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 42 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Operation of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
of the vehicle fig. 26.
In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
process, the curtain airbag covers the side windows and door pillars.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of
fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and
help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant pu
chest are surrounded and pro
Safety notes on the ope
If you use airbags correc
risk of injury in many kin
WARNING
In order for the side airba prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.
For safety reasons, the cu vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to
There must be no other p pants of the outer seats and so that the curtain airbag can greatest possible protection. expressly approved for use in windows page 223, Acce tions.
The built-in coat hooks sh not leave any heavy or sharp hang the clothes on coat han
The airbags provide prote they have deployed.
Any work on the curtain a the airbag components for ot
Fig. 26 Deployed curtain airbags
Airbag system 43
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 43 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system44
g is deactivated, only the front airbag is
irbags in the vehicle remain activated.
senger airbag
the key-operated switch in the glove
n OFF fig. 27.
lamp OFF on the instrument panel
en the ignition is switched on .
nger airbag
the key-operated switch in the glove
n ON fig. 27.
Fig. 28 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console
A0
A1
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 44 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Deactivating airbags
Front passenger airbag deactivation
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.
When the passenger airba
deactivated. All the other a
Deactivating the front pas
Switch the ignition off.
Turn the ignition key in
compartment to positio
Check that the warning
fig. 28 remains lit wh
Activating the front passe
Switch the ignition off.
Turn the ignition key in
compartment to positio
Fig. 27 In the glove compartment: switch for activating and deacti- vating the front passenger airbag
Airbag system 45
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
key to activate/deactivate the front passenger nger airbag will be activated/deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 45 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel
page 44, fig. 28 does not light up when the ignition is
switched on .
WARNING
The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.
You should only deactivate the front passenger airbag when, in excep- tional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 46, Child safety.
Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. Otherwise, there is a risk of death. If under exceptional circumstances it is necessary to trans- port a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.
As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, which could cause the airbag to not deploy properly or not deploy at all.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up, there may be a fault in the airbag system:
Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.
Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.
It is unpredictable whether the front passenger airbag will deploy in the event of an accident. Warn all your passengers of this.
When using the ignition airbag, only the front passe side airbag and head airbag
WARNING (continued)
Child safety46
the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction
oard documentation.
hild seats
s substantially reduces the risk of
onsible for any children you transport in
properly using the appropriate child
seat belt is properly positioned according
ided by the manufacturer of the child
allow children to distract you from traffic.
uring long trips. Take a break at least
facing backwards on the front passenger seat irbag has been disabled. This could lead to a es to the child! However, if it is necessary, in rt a child in the front passenger seat, the front s be disabled page 44, Deactivating
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 46 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
For safety reasons we recommend that children under 12 years of age travel
on the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children trav-
elling on the rear seat must use a child seat or a seat belt. It is advisable that
children always travel in the rear seats, the rear central position being the
safest seat, since the risk of injuries in a side collision is diminished.
The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to
children. page 19, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do
not have muscle and bone structures fully developed. This means that chil-
dren are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Programme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke1).
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note
page 46, Safety notes on using child seats.
We recommend you to include
manual together with the on-b
Safety notes on using c
Proper use of child seat
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are resp
your vehicle.
Protect your children by
seats page 48.
Always ensure that the
to the instructions prov
seat.
When travelling, do not
Take breaks regularly d
every two hours.
WARNING
Never install a child seat unless the front passenger a risk of potentially fatal injuri exceptional cases, to transpo passenger airbag must alway1) Not for all countries
Child safety 47
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
aximum protection only when the seat belt is 22, Seat belts.
py a child seat page 48, Child seats.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 47 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
airbags. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to disconnect the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.
All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!
Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other passengers.
If children assume an improper sitting position when the vehicle is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly important if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or even death.
A suitable child seat can protect your child!
Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the vehicle.
Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision or in sudden braking manoeuvres.
The seat belt provides m properly positioned page
Only one child may occu
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Child safety48
ats
a correctly adjusted seat belt can
child.
t 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration fig. 29.
ut 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration.
ructions and observe any statutory require-
ing child seats.
the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction
oard documentation.
ormation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 46.
Fig. 29 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 48 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic
Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: children up to 10 kg
Group 0+: children up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child se
A suitable child seat and
help you to protect your
Group 0: For babies from abou
suitable seats are those appe
Group 0+: For babies from abo
suitable seats are those appe
Follow the manufacturer's inst
ments when installing and us
We recommend you to include
manual together with the on-b
WARNING
Read and always observe inf child seats in Safety
Child safety 49
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ats
d a correctly adjusted seat belt can
r child.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
ing child seats.
e the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction
board documentation.
weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
ats together with properly adjusted seat belts.
eighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
by seat cushions with head restraints together
fig. 31.
Fig. 31 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 49 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the rear
of the vehicle are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing
between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to include the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction
manual together with the on-board documentation.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Group 2 and 3 child se
A suitable child seat an
help you to protect you
Follow the manufacturer's ins
ments when installing and us
We recommend you to includ
manual together with the on-
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age
protected by group 2 child se
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age w
metres tall are best protected
with properly worn seat belts
Fig. 30 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
Child safety50
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 50 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
WARNING
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 22, Seat belts.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Child safety 51
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
n must be secured in the vehicle with a age, weight and size.
facing backwards on the front passenger seat irbag has been disabled. This could cause fatal r, if, in exceptional cases, it is necessary to passenger seat, the front passenger airbag
irbags must always be disabled and the seat tion, where possible.
information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 46.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 51 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on
the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
Child seats in groups 0 to 3can be secured with a seat belt.
Seats for children aged 0, 0+ and 1 with the ISOFIX system can be
secured without fastening seat belts, using the ISOFIXand/or Top Tether
securing rings page 52.
U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age
category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult
seat belt).
*: Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, as high as
possible and always deactivate the airbag.
L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX anchors.
WARNING
When travelling, childre restraint system suitable for
Never install a child seat unless the front passenger a injuries to the child! Howeve transport a child in the front page 44, Deactivating a adjusted to its highest posi
Read and always observe of child seats in Safe
Category Weight
Seat locations
Front passenger
Rear outer Rear centre
Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U
Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U
Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U
Child safety52
given by the child seat manufacturer
ing the seat.
the vehicle's ISOFIX anchorages
nd the seat fig. 32.
horages along the plastic guides until
ISOFIX rings (when correctly closed, you
seat should also have a visual indicator
secured) fig. 33.
ystem is correctly secured by pulling on
e supplied with the child safety seat.
ntings are available from Dealers and specialist
Fig. 33 The ISOFIX child seat anchors slide along the fitted plastic guides until secured in the vehicle's ISOFIX anchor- ages
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 52 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Child seat mounting using the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether system
The Child restraint systems may be fitted to the rear seat
quickly and safely with the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether system
(fitted to the rear backrest).
Following the instructions
when installing and remov
Fit the plastic guides on
between the backrest a
Slide the child seat anc
secured in the vehicle's
will hear a click and the
to confirm it is correctly
Check that the ISOFIX s
the child seat.
Detailed fitting instructions ar
Child seats with ISOFIX mou
retailers.
Fig. 32 Position of the ISOFIX anchors on the side rear seat
Child safety 53
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
educe forwards movements of the safety seat in
sk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside
tive will introduce requirements related to the
tems by means of ISOFIX and Top Tether anchor-
or new types from 2010), which will entail
ld restraint seat and less head movement in
r-facing seats
rear-facing child safety seats fitted with a
y read and follow the safety seat manufacturer's
n how to install the retainer strap properly.
safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the
ap to a hook in the luggage compartment.
ge or other items to the lower anchorages Top Tether).
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 53 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
The retainers employed for this child safety seat are specially designed for the ISOFIX system. Never secure other child seats, seat belts or other items into the retainers. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Top Tether retainer straps
Some child restraint seats have a third Top Tether anchoring
point, apart from both ISOFIX anchoring points, which
allow better child retention.
The Top Tether system has an upper strap for attachment to the vehicle's
upper anchoring point, which is found on the rear luggage compartment
cover.
The retainer strap is used to r
a crash, helping reduce the ri
of the vehicle.
It is foreseen that an EU Direc
retention of child restraint sys
ages (probably compulsory f
improved retention of the chi
case of frontal collisions.
Use of retainer straps on rea
At present there are very few
retainer strap. Please carefull
instructions for information o
WARNING
An undue installation of the event of a crash.
Never tie the retainer str
Never secure or tie lugga (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (
Fig. 34 Position of the Top Tether rings on the rear tray
Child safety54
se it from the anchoring support.
WARNINGS page 53.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 54 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Fitting the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point
Securing the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point situated on the rear shelf
Pull out the fastening belt of the child restraint seat according to
the manufacturer's instructions.
Lead the Top Tether fastening belt under the rear seat head
restraint fig. 35 (lift the head restraint where necessary).
Slide the belt so that the Top Tether belt of the child restraint seat
is correctly secured to the rear shelf anchorage.
Firmly tighten the Top Tether belt following the child restraint
seat manufacturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
Release the retainer strap in line with the instructions given by
the child safety seat manufacturer.
Push the lock and relea
WARNING
Read and bear in mind all the
Fig. 35 Retainer strap: correct adjustment and fitting
55
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 55 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
56
Fig. 3
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 56 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
6 Some of the equipment listed in this section is only fitted on certain models or are optional extras.
Cockpit 57
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
t fitted: Sound system or navigation
ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
indow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ving home: delayed lights off and
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
telephone*
159
32
164
127
171
154
154
66
176
138
228
120
119
180
32
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 57 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Operating Instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Dash panel overview
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door handle
Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric control for exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlets with thumbwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for turn signals and main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Levers and switches for:
Windscreen wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamp indicating that front passenger airbag has
been disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for acoustic parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment
Depending on equipmen
system
Lockable glove compartm
Front passenger airbag
Air conditioner . . . . . . .
Switch for heated rear w
Thumbwheel for seat he
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual gear lever
Cigarette lighter / Power
Auxiliary socket
Tyre pressure monitoring
Storage compartment
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . .
Seat memory* . . . . . . .
Bonnet lock release . .
Headlight range control
coming home and lea
anticipated lights on
Lever for cruise control
Steering wheel with:
Horn
Driver airbag . . . . . .
Controls for radio and
A1 109
A2
A3 100
A4 132
A5 169
A6 116
A7 123
A8 59
A9
128
85
87
A10 173
A11
68
44
177
A12 122
A13 153
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
Cockpit58
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 58 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Adjustable steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-board documentation compartment / knee airbag* . . . .
Note Separate Instruction Manual is enclosed if the vehicle is equipped with a
factory-fitted radio or navigation system.
The arrangement of switches and controls on right-hand drive models*
may be slightly different from the layout shown in page 56, fig. 36.
However, the symbols used to identify the controls are the same.
A33 172
A34 32
Cockpit 59
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
62
74
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 59 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Instruments
Instrument panel overview
The instrument panel is the driver's information centre.
Fig. 37 Overview of instrument panel
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev counter incorporating digital clock and date . . . . . . . . . .
Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer (incorporating odometer display) . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjuster buttons for
Digital clock and date
Instrument lighting .
Digital display with
Service interval displa
A1 60
A2 61, 61
A3 65
A4 63
A5 63
A6
A7
Cockpit60
dle will settle somewhere in the centre of the
ed running temperature. The temperature may
orking hard, especially at high outside temper-
ncern, provided the warning lamp does not
el.
display, this means that either the coolant
coolant level is too low page 78.
t and checking the coolant level, observe the 229.
en steam or coolant is being released from it. t until you can no longer see or hear escaping
nlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
d high engine loads, there is a risk of the
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 60 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call-up button for service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset button for trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant temperature gauge
The coolant temperature gauge fig. 38 only works when the ignition is
switched on. In order to avoid engine damage, please read the following
notes for the different temperature ranges.
Cold temperature
If the needle is still on the left of the dial, this indicates that the engine has
not yet reached operating temperature. Avoid high revs and heavy accelera-
tion and do not make the engine work hard.
Normal temperature
In normal operations, the nee
dial once the engine has reach
also rise when the engine is w
atures. This is no cause for co
light up in the instrument pan
Warning temperature
If the symbol flashes in the
temperature is too high or the
WARNING
Before opening the bonne warning information page
Never open the bonnet wh This could lead to burns. Wai steam or coolant.
Caution Accessories in front of the air i
high outside temperatures an
engine overheating.
71
A8 64
A9 74
A10 63
Fig. 38 Engine coolant temperature gauge
AA
AB
AC
Cockpit 61
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
nvironment s early will help you to reduce fuel consumption,
ine noise.
d with a quartz clock.
using the and buttons.
n. The hour display will start to flash.
ons to set the hour.
Fig. 40 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Digital clock
+ -
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 61 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Rev counter
The rev counter indicates the number of engine revolutions
per minute.
You should select a lower gear if the engine speed drops below 1500 rpm.
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed
which may be used when the engine is warm and after it has been run in prop-
erly. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or lift your foot off the accel-
erator before the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution The rev counter needle fig. 39 must only reach the red zone for a short
period, otherwise the engine could be damaged. The start of the red zone on
the dial is different for some engine versions.
For the sake of the e Changing up into higher gear
emissions and minimise eng
Digital clock and date
Your vehicle is equippe
The time and date are set
Setting the hour
Press the butto
Use the and butt
Fig. 39 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Rev counter
MODE
+ -
Cockpit62
off, the odometer and the digital clock with
on for a few seconds by pressing the CHECK
.
strument lighting can be adjusted as
increase the brightness of the instrument
educe the brightness of the instrument
and needles), the centre console illumination
plays are regulated by a photodiode incorpo-
depending on the outside light.
Fig. 41 Instrument panel lighting
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 62 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Setting the minutes
Keep pressing the button until the minutes display
flashes.
Use the and buttons to set the minutes.
Setting the date
Keep pressing the button until the date display (day)
flashes.
Use the and buttons to set the day.
Keep pressing the button until the month display flashes.
Use the and buttons to set the month.
Keep pressing the button until the year display flashes.
Use the and buttons to set the year.
Deactivating the date display
Keep pressing the button until the complete date display
flashes.
Use the button to disable the date display.
Activating the date display
Keep pressing the button until the complete date display
flashes.
Use the button to enable the date display.
When the display stops flashing, this means the setting you are performing
is completed and the time and date have been successfully stored.
When the ignition is switched
date display can be switched
button page 59, fig. 37
Instrument lighting
The brightness of the in
required.
Press the "+" button to
lighting.
Press the "-" button to r
lighting.
The instrument lighting (dials
and the illumination of the dis
rated in the instrument panel,
MODE
+ -
MODE
+ -
MODE
+ -
MODE
+ -
MODE
-
MODE
+
A8
Cockpit 63
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ment panel, the letters DEF will appear perma-
play. Please have the fault repaired as soon as
lted when the ignition is switched on.
e message SAFE will appear in the trip recorder
nger be started if that happens.
the ignition is switched on.
reserve zone, the symbol lights up in the
age 80. At this point there are still about 8 to 10
his is your reminder to fill up soon.
city of your vehicle in the page 311, Dimen-
.
dry. If there is an irregular fuel supply, misfiring
el could reach the exhaust system without
catalytic converter reheating and being
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 63 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Speedometer with odometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and the
distance travelled.
The distance is normally stated in kilometres (km). On some models,
however, the odometer will show miles.
Lower odometer
The lower odometer records the vehicle's total mileage.
Upper odometer (trip recorder)
The upper odometer shows the distance that has been travelled since the trip
recorder was last reset. It is used to measure short trips. The last digit of the
trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or tenths of a mile. The upper
odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the reset button fig. 42.
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instru
nently in the trip recorder dis
possible.
Electronic immobiliser
The vehicle key data is consu
If an uncoded key is used, th
display. The vehicle can no lo
Fuel reserve
The display only works when
When the needle reaches the
instrument panel display p
litres of fuel left in the tank. T
You can consult the tank capa
sions and capacities section
Caution Never run the tank completely
can occur. This means that fu
burning. This may lead to the
damaged.
Fig. 42 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Odometer
Cockpit64
the display page 75, or if the bulb monitor
lights page 82, the relevant driver informa-
briefly pressing the button. For
il level
om the display after about 5 seconds.
on to set speed limit warning 1 page 83,
while the vehicle is moving. Speed limit
g speed limit warning 2 can only be set when
CHECK
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 64 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
CHECK button
The button has the following functions:
Activating the digital clock and the odometer
When the ignition is switched off, the odometer and the digital clock with
date display can be enabled for a few seconds by pressing the button
fig. 43.
Starting check procedure (auto-check control)
The auto-check control page 75 checks important components and vehicle
systems. These background checks are run constantly, as long as the ignition
is switched on.
You can start the check procedure manually by pressing the button
with the ignition switched on. This function check can be started with the
engine either switched off or running, but not at road speeds above 5 km/h.
Calling up driver messages
If a Priority 1 symbol flashes in
detects a failure of one of the
tion can be called up again by
example:
Switch off engine, check o
The message will disappear fr
Setting the speed warning
You can press the butt
Setting speed limit warning 1
warning 2* page 84, Settin
the ignition is switched off.Fig. 43 Detailed view of the instrument panel: CHECK button
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK
Cockpit 65
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
nitored by the auto-check control page 75. If
his will be shown by the display in the instru-
symbol (priority 1 - danger) or a yellow symbol
page 67
als page 67
system (ABS) page 67
ng page 68
s page 68
ility Programme (ESP) page 68
page 69
dlights page 69
ment (alternative to ) page 69
m (alternative to ) page 70
ystem / handbrake is page 70
ls page 68
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 65 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Warning and indicator lamps
General description
The warning and indicator lamps indicate a number of
different functions and possible faults.
Fig. 44 Instrument panel with warning and indicator lamps
Note A number of functions are mo
a malfunction should occur, t
ment panel either with a red
(priority 2 - warning).
Exhaust emission control system page 66
Airbag system page 66
Tyre pressure too low page 66
Cruise control
Trailer turn sign
Anti-lock brake
Seat belt warni
Left turn signal
Electronic Stab
Alternator
Main beam hea
Engine manage
Glow plug syste
Fault in brake s
applied
Right turn signa
Cockpit66
amp*
be corrected as soon as possible if
Fig. 45 Display: system fault
Fig. 46 Display: warning message
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 66 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Exhaust emission control system
If the warning lamp lights up continuously you should take your vehicle to a
specialised workshop as soon as possible in order to have the fault repaired.
If the warning lamp flashes drive on at reduced speed and seek professional
help in order to avoid damage to the catalytic converter.
For further information on the catalytic converter, see page 198.
Airbag system
This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension
device system.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on.
If the warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up, flashes or flickers when
the vehicle is moving, this indicates a malfunction in the system.
WARNING
If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that the airbag system and/or belt tensioners may not be triggered in an accident.
Tyre pressure warning l
The tyre pressure should
it is too low.
Cockpit 67
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ashes when the turn signals are oper-
ravan or trailer.
es when the turn signals are operated if a trailer
hicle.
s not work, either on the trailer or on the towing
will not flash.
(ABS)
itors the ABS and the integrated elec-
EDL).
p for a few seconds when the ignition is
gine is being started. The lamp goes out again
ugh an automatic test sequence.
ot light up when the ignition is switched on
ot go out again after a few seconds
p when the vehicle is moving
he normal way (except that the ABS control func-
ake the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon
ation on the ABS, see page 192.
in the ABS, the ESP warning lamp will also light
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 67 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The yellow warning lamp remains on if the system is faulty or if
the pressure is too low in at least one tyre. In the event of a system
fault, the letters TPMS are displayed in the centre of the instrument
panel page 66, fig. 45. If the tyre pressure drops rapidly,
message page 66, fig. 46 will be shown on the central display
of the instrument panel. If the pressure loss is more gradual,
message page 66, fig. 46 will be shown on the central display
of the instrument panel. This message does not show the tyre
affected. Should any of these warnings be displayed:
Stop the vehicle.
Check the tyres. Although the warning corresponds to just one
tyre, you should also check the others.
Correct the tyre pressure page 246.
For more detailed information on the tyre pressure monitoring system, please
refer to page 245.
Cruise control system*
The indicator lamp on the instrument panel lights up when the cruise
control system is operating.
Trailer turn signals*
This turn signal lamp fl
ating while towing a ca
The turn signal lamp flash
is correctly coupled to the ve
Where a turn signal bulb doe
vehicle, the turn signal bulb
Anti-lock brake system
The warning lamp mon
tronic differential lock (
The warning lamp lights u
switched on and while the en
after the system has run thro
There is a fault in the ABS if:
The warning lamp does n
The warning lamp does n
The warning lamp lights u
The vehicle can still brake in t
tion is out of action). Please t
as possible. For further inform
If a malfunction should occur
up.
AA
AB
Cockpit68
*
s a reminder to the driver to fasten
, the warning lamp will remain lit until the
applicable) have fastened their seat belts.
a certain speed, you will also hear a warning
ill flash.
seat belts, see page 22.
warning lights
al is operated, either the left or right turn
signal lamps will flash when the hazard
.
tor lamp will start flashing twice as fast as
ing a trailer. Where a turn signal bulb does not
n the towing vehicle, the turn signal bulb will
on on the turn signals, see page 123.
ramme
itors the Electronic Stability
following functions:
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 68 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Entire brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp
page 70 (with the handbrake released), this indicates not only a fault
in the ABS function, but probably also a malfunction in the main brake system
.
The symbol will light up in the instrument panel if a fault occurs in the brake system. Please refer to page 77.
Electronic differential lock (EDL) fault
The EDL works in conjunction with the ABS. The ABS indicator lamp will light
up to indicate an EDL fault. Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop
as soon as possible. For further information on the EDL, see page 193.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level, observe the warning information in page 229, Work in the engine compart- ment.
If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level has dropped below the "MIN" mark you must not drive on, as there is a risk of accident. Obtain technical assist- ance.
If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a fault in the ABS control function. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under certain circum- stances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest special- ised workshop and have the fault repaired.
Seat belt warning lamp
The warning lamp acts a
the seat belt.
After switching on the ignition
driver and front passenger (if
When the vehicle has reached
signal and the warning light w
For further information on the
Turn signals and hazard
Depending on which turn sign
signal lamp flashes. Both turn
warning lights are switched on
If a turn signal fails, the indica
normal.
This does not apply when tow
work, either on the trailer or o
not flash. For further informati
Electronic Stability Prog
This warning lamp mon
Programme (ESP).
The warning lamp has the
Cockpit 69
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
in the instrument panel lights up as well as the
driving page 78, stop the vehicle immedi-
e. In this case the coolant pump is no longer
f engine damage.
up when the main beams are on or when the
.
main beam headlights, see page 123.
itors the engine management system
nic Power Control) lights up while the function
hile the vehicle is moving, this indicates a fault
stem. The vehicle must be taken immediately to
the engine serviced.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 69 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
It will start flashing to indicate that ESP is counteracting an unstable
driving condition.
It lights up when the ignition is switched on for approx. 2 seconds while
the function is checked.
The warning lamp will light up if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
It will light up after the battery has been disconnected.
The warning lamp will light up if the ESP is switched off.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP
operates in conjunction with the ABS.
If the ESP warning lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started, this
may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP. In this
case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then on
again. After this the warning lamp should go out to show that the system is
fully functional.
The warning lamp will light up when the ignition is switched on if the battery
has been disconnected and then reconnected. It should go out again after
driving a short distance if the steering wheel is turned slightly.
For further information on the ESP, see page 193.
Alternator
The warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator or in the
vehicle's electrical system.
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should
switch off after the engine has started.
If the warning lamp lights up when you are driving, you can normally
continue as far as the nearest qualified workshop. However, given that the
battery will be running down, any electrical consumption not absolutely vital
should be switched off.
Caution If the coolant warning lamp
alternator waning lamp while
ately and switch off the engin
working, and there is a risk o
Main beam headlights
The indicator lamp lights
headlight flasher is operated
For further information on the
Engine management
This warning lamp mon
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electro
is being checked.
Note If the warning lamp lights up w
in the engine management sy
a qualified workshop to have
Cockpit70
ts up when the handbrake is applied. In addi-
rning page 76 switches on after driving for 3
m/h.
t and checking the brake fluid level, observe page 229, Work in the engine compart-
does not go out, or if it lights up when in the reservoir is too low and this may cause top the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain
lights up together with the ABS warning re is a fault in the ABS control function. As a ck relatively easily when braking. Under ar of the vehicle could suddenly sway from uent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the p and have the fault repaired.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 70 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Glow plug system
The indicator lamp lights up while the glow plugs are
preheating.
The indicator lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When
the indicator lamp goes out the engine should be started straight away. When
the engine is warm, or at outside temperatures above +8 C, the warning
lamp will only light up very briefly.
Note If the glow plug indicator lamp should start flashing while the vehicle is
moving, this indicates a fault in the engine management system. The engine
should be serviced without delay.
If the indicator lamp fails to light up when the ignition is switched on, this
can mean that the glow plug system is defective. The engine should be
serviced.
Brake system
The warning lamp flashes when the handbrake is applied, or
if the brake fluid level is too low or if there is a fault in the ABS
system.
If the warning lamp flashes (and the handbrake is not applied), stop the
vehicle and check the brake fluid level page 240.
If a failure should occur in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp will light up
together with the brake warning lamp .
Handbrake on
The warning lamp also ligh
tion to this, the handbrake wa
seconds at a speed above 5 k
WARNING
Before opening the bonne the warning information in ment.
If the brake warning lamp driving, the brake fluid level an increased accident risk. S technical assistance.
If the brake warning lamp lamp, this can mean that the result, the rear wheels can lo certain circumstances, the re side to side, with the subseq nearest specialised worksho
Cockpit 71
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
display will show a red or yellow warning
l indicates a serious malfunction page 77. A
tes a less serious malfunction page 79.
ne display* page 72
page 72
page 73
he 7-speed automatic gear- page 189
multitronic* page 185
page 73
page 74
page 74
page 75
page 76
page 76
page 82
page 85
page 89
Separate Instruc-
tion Manual
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 71 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Driver information system
General notes
The driver information system in the instrument panel shows
the status of various on-board systems at a glance.
The display for the driver information system is in the centre of the instrument
panel.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-
tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. The DIS system gives an
audible warning if a fault should occur or if servicing is required, and a red or
yellow warning symbol (in some cases with a corresponding driver message)
appears in the instrument panel display.
The driver is informed on the audio system.
The driver information system includes the following functions:
Note If a fault should occur, the
symbol. A red warning symbo
yellow warning symbol indica
Fig. 47 Cockpit: Digital instrument panel display
CD player, radio and telepho
Outside temperature display
Gear indicator*
Selector lever positions for t
box*
Selector lever positions with
Distance to empty
Door and tailgate warning
Service indicator
auto-check control
Driving tips
Handbrake warning
Bulb monitor*
Onboard computer*
Tyre pressure monitoring*
Navigation information*
Cockpit72
splay
wn in the display when the ignition is switched
an automatic gearbox, the display does not
gaged a gear.
snowflake symbol appears next to the temper-
he driver to take extra care when there is a risk
ehicle is stationary or travelling at very low
layed may be slightly higher than the actual
ult of heat coming from the engine.
ioner and the display is changed over to F
ide temperature display automatically changes
mperature display as an ice warning. Please e ice on the roads even at outside tempera- patches.
Fig. 49 Display: Outside temperature display
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 72 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
CD, radio and telephone* display
If the radio is switched on and no Priority 2 faults are indicated by the auto-
check control, depending on the type of radio fitted, the display will show the
name or frequency of the selected radio station and complementary informa-
tion, once the OK symbol has gone out.
When in CD mode*, the display will show the current track.
If you have a compatible telephone*, the phone book or telephone dialled
can also be seen on this display.
These displays appear in addition to the display on the radio itself.
Outside temperature di
The outside temperature is sho
on fig. 49. In vehicles with
appear until the driver has en
At temperatures below +5 C a
ature display. This is to warn t
of ice on the road. When the v
speeds, the temperature disp
ambient temperature as a res
If the vehicle has an air condit
(degrees Fahrenheit), the outs
over to F page 167.
WARNING
Do not rely on the outside te bear in mind that there may b tures of +5 C beware of ice
Fig. 48 Display: addi- tional radio information
Cockpit 73
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
mend any gear-change while you are acceler-
he gear-change display deactivated by an
isplay can help you to plan your trip.
pty is displayed in km. It shows how far the
e amount of fuel left in the tank, assuming the
tance to empty is displayed in increments of 10
lated on the basis of the fuel consumption over
stance to empty will increase if you drive in a
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 73 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note When the display shows route guidance instructions from the navigation
system, the outside temperature appears in the second line of the radio
display.
Gear display*
This display helps to save fuel.
Use the gear display to save fuel. The display fig. 50 on the instrument
panel recommends that you select the gear indicated by the arrow. It may
also skip a gear, and recommend changing up from 4th gear to 6th gear, for
example.
Note The display may not recom
ating.
If desired, you can have t
Authorised Service Centre.
Distance to empty
The distance to empty d
The estimated distance to em
vehicle can be driven with th
same style of driving. The dis
km.
The distance to empty is calcu
the last 30 kilometres. The di
more economical manner.
Fig. 50 Gear display
Cockpit74
driver when the next routine service
rvice
tton briefly with the ignition switched on,
e vehicle can be driven before the next service
ed out with the engine stopped or running up
km and after the ignition cycle, the kilometres
spection are not displayed.
ssed before the first 500 km the following indi-
ith LongLife Service Intervals*.
Fig. 52 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Service indicator
A1
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 74 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Door and tailgate warning
The door and tailgate warning symbol lights up if one or more of the doors, or
the bonnet or tailgate are not properly closed when the ignition is on. The
symbol also indicates which of these is not properly closed. The display in the
illustration fig. 51 shows that the driver door is open.
The corresponding part of the pictogram will flash if either the bonnet or tail-
gate are open. The warning symbol goes out when the bonnet, tailgate and
all the doors are closed.
In vehicles with a driver information system and an onboard computer* the
door catches/tailgate warning symbol can be switched off by briefly pressing
one of the control switches for the onboard computer page 86. However,
the warning symbol will appear again if any of the doors or the bonnet or tail-
gate is opened or closed.
Service indicator
This display reminds the
is due.
Displaying distance to next se
When you press the service bu
the display will show how far th
is due. This check can be carri
to 5 km/h. Before the first 500
and days before the service in
If the service button is pre
cation appears on screen:
Service in ----- km --- days
This is also valid for vehicles w
Fig. 51 Display: Door and tailgate warning
A1
Cockpit 75
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ease remember that it is essential to service the
d time limits to prevent its deterioration and to
arly that of the engine). The period between two
r than the time specified in the Maintenance
cover a low mileage during this time.
dicator between services, otherwise the display
rvice indicator remains intact if the battery is
ervice cannot be called up if the system has
symbol).
m
s important components and vehicle systems.
run constantly, as long as the ignition is
e instrument panel if a fault should occur or if
re urgently required. This is accompanied by an
nding on the priority of the fault, a red or yellow
the display.
ger, whereas the yellow one represents a
s for the driver may be shown with the red or
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 75 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Service reminder
The instrument panel controls the distance travelled every day. It calculates
the average of these distances travelled and activates the service reminder
sufficiently in advance.
The display reverts back to the standard display after about 5 seconds. The
remaining distance to the next service is updated every time the ignition is
switched on, until the service becomes due.
Service due
When a service is due, SERVICE! will appear in the display immediately after
you switch on the ignition. The display reverts back to the standard display
after about 5 seconds.
Resetting the display
The display is reset by the workshop after the service has been carried out.
The service interval will be set to a LongLife Service (flexible service interval)
or Inspection Service (fixed service interval), depending on which engine oil
is used. It is only possible to reset the display via the instrument panel when
an oil change is performed; in this case the display can only be reset to a fixed
service interval of 15,000 km. Proceed as follows:
Switch the ignition off.
Press the service button page 74, fig. 52 and hold while switching
on the ignition. The display will show one of these messages:
Service in ----- km or Service!
Now press and hold the reset button until the display shows
Service in ----- km --- days or Service!
The display switches out of the reset mode if you do not press the reset button
within 5 seconds.
Caution The system cannot calculate the figures for the service interval display if the
battery is disconnected from the vehicle, so no service reminder can be
displayed during this time. Pl
vehicle within the establishe
extend its useful life (particul
services must never be longe
Programme, even if you only
Note Do not reset the service in
will be incorrect.
The information in the se
disconnected.
The distance to the next s
detected a Priority 1 fault (red
Auto-check syste
Introduction
The auto-check system check
These background checks are
switched on.
A message is displayed on th
any maintenance or repairs a
audible warning signal. Depe
warning symbol lights up on
The red symbol indicates dan warning. Additional message
yellow symbols.
A1
A2
Cockpit76
ymbols
pears in the display, it will automatically be
nding driver message.
displayed to indicate that the windscreen
dition, the following message will appear:
ter a few seconds. If required, the message can
ressing the button.
on and when stationary apply footbrake to p a second time. They will remain in the display
d or until a gear is selected.
.
e handbrake still applied, you will hear a
y will show the message:
es on after driving for 3 seconds at speeds
CHECK
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 76 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Driver messages
Additional messages for the driver are displayed together
with the warning symbols on the instrument panel.
Driver messages and red symbols
If a red warning symbol appears on the display, you can press the
button fig. 53 to call up an additional driver message.
For example: in the event of an oil pressure malfunction, the oil pressure
symbol will appear in the display. If you now press the button, the
following message will appear in the display:
Switch off engine, check oil level
The message will disappear from the display after about 5 seconds. If
required, the message can be called up again by briefly pressing the
button.
Driver messages and yellow s
If a yellow warning symbol ap
accompanied by the correspo
For example, the symbol is
washer fluid level is low. In ad
Top up washer fluid
The message will disappear af
be called up again by briefly p
Note The messages handbrake select gear cannot be called u
until the handbrake is release
Handbrake warning
Release the handbrake
If you drive by mistake with th
warning buzzer and the displa
Handbrake on
The handbrake warning switch
above 5 km/h.
Fig. 53 Instrument panel: CHECK button
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK
Cockpit 77
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
indicate a Priority 1 fault (serious malfunction).
by three warning chimes. The symbols will keep
orrected. If several Priority 1 faults are detected
ls are displayed one after the other for about 2
m
em should be repaired as soon as
n the display, there is a fault in the brake
ing messages will appear in the display
ake fluid and hydraulic fluid levels
e system (ABS) Take vehicle to workshop
evel page 240.
ing lamp will light up together with the brake
.
et and checking the brake fluid level, observe page 229, Work in the engine compart-
the reservoir is too low, this could result in an btain technical assistance.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 77 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Red symbols
A red symbol warns of a danger.
Stop the vehicle.
Switch the engine off.
Check the fault. Obtain professional assistance if necessary.
The red symbols are used to
A red symbol is accompanied
flashing until the faults are c
at the same time, the symbo
seconds.
Fault in the brake syste
A fault in the brake syst
possible.
If the symbol flashes i
system. One of the follow
together with the symbol:
Stop vehicle, check br
Warning! Fault in brak
Stop the vehicle.
Check the brake fluid l
If the ABS fails, the ABS warn
system fault symbol
WARNING
Before opening the bonn the warning information in ment.
If the brake fluid level in accident. Do not drive on! O
BRAKES
Fault in brake system page 77
COOLANT
Coolant level too low / coolant tem-
perature too high
page 78
OIL PRESSURE
Engine oil pressure too low page 78
Fig. 54 Display: Coolant level warning
Cockpit78
lights up as well page 69, it is possible that
has come on to indicate a fault in the cooling
sk of engine damage.
low
is too low the fault must be repaired
n the display, the oil pressure is too low.
l appear in the display together with the
k oil level
vel page 232.
istance if necessary.
w, add more oil page 233.
the engine oil level is correct, obtain profes-
on! Do not continue to run the engine, even at
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 78 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp, this can mean that there is a fault in the ABS control function. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under certain circumstances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.
Fault in the cooling system
Faults in the cooling system must be repaired immediately.
If the symbol flashes in the display, this means that either the
coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. The
following message will appear in the display together with the
symbol:
Switch off engine and check coolant level
Stop the vehicle.
Switch the engine off.
Check the coolant level page 234.
Add more coolant if necessary page 235.
Wait for the symbol to go out before driving on.
Obtain professional assistance if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction
of the radiator fan.
If the alternator warning lamp
the drive belt has broken.
Caution Do not drive on if the symbol
system, otherwise there is a ri
Engine oil pressure too
If the engine oil pressure
immediately.
If the symbol flashes i
The following message wil
symbol:
Switch off engine, chec
Stop the vehicle.
Switch the engine off.
Check the engine oil le
Obtain professional ass
Engine oil level too low
If the engine oil level is too lo
Engine oil level correct
If the symbol flashes and
sional assistance. Do not drive
idle speed.
WARNING (continued)
Cockpit 79
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
dicate a Priority 2 fault (warning).
level page 80
faulty* page 80
filter* obstructed page 80
sensor faulty page 81
page 81
page 81
t range control* faulty page 81
hts* faulty page 81
l low* page 81
* page 81
o high or too low* page 81
page 82
nitoring system* page 89
nitoring system*
ble
page 66
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 79 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note The oil pressure warning lamp is not an indicator for the oil level. The oil
level should therefore be checked regularly, preferably every time you fill the
tank.
Yellow symbols
A yellow symbol indicates a warning.
Yellow symbols are used to in
Brake light failure warning light page 80
Fuel level low page 80
Engine speed governing page 80
Fig. 55 Display: Fuel level low
Check engine oil
Engine oil sensor
Diesel particulate
Photosensor/rain
Brake pad worn
Speed warning 1
Dynamic headligh
Adaptive headlig
Washer fluid leve
Speed warning 2
Battery voltage to
Bulb monitor*
Tyre pressure mo
Loss of pressure
TPMS Tyre pressure mo
System not availa
Cockpit80
ase check the engine oil level as soon as
the oil at the next opportunity page 233.
tive *
e the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have
ntil then it is advisable to check the oil level
page 232.
obstructed
u can contribute towards automatic filter
t manner. To do this, drive about 15 minutes in
rbox: S gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with
mately 2000 rpm. The increase in temperature
ter. When cleaning is successful, the symbol
n off, or the three lamps turn on (particulate
tem fault and heaters ), take the vehicle
air the fault.
diesel particulate filter, see page 199.
your speed to suit the weather, road, terrain commended driving speed must never lead to affic regulations.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 80 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Yellow symbols are accompanied by one warning buzzer. The function indi-
cated should be checked as soon as possible. If several Priority 2 faults are
detected at the same time, the symbols are displayed one after the other for
about 2 seconds at a time.
Brake light failure
This warning light will appear on the upper part of the display if any of the
brake lights has failed. A text message in the central part of the display indi-
cates which brake light has failed (left or right).
Fuel level low
When this symbol comes on for the first time, there are about 8 to 10 litres
of fuel left in the tank. You should fill up as soon as possible page 225.
Engine speed governing
Max. engine speed XXXX rpm
There is a fault in the engine management. In addition, the warning lamp
on the instrument panel will light up. The engine speed will be governed to
the speed displayed in the driver information system. Please ensure that the
engine speed does not exceed the speed shown (for example, when
changing down a gear).
Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop immediately to have the fault
repaired.
Check engine oil level
If the symbol lights up, ple
possible page 232. Top up
Engine oil sensor defec
If the symbol lights up, tak
the oil level sensor checked. U
every time you fill up with fuel
Diesel particulate filter
If the symbol lights up, yo
cleaning by driving in the righ
4th or 5th gear (automatic gea
the engine running at approxi
will burn off any soot in the fil
switches off.
If the symbol does not tur
filter , emission control sys
to a qualified workshop to rep
For further information on the
WARNING
It is essential that you adjust and traffic conditions. The re the driver disregarding the tr
Cockpit 81
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
aulty
ulty
t the adaptive headlight system is faulty. Take
kshop to have the headlights or the adaptive
d.
up the fluid for the windscreen washer and
page 236.
is means you are exceeding the speed that has
uce your speed accordingly page 82.
h or too low
ke the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have
hether the alternator warning lamp has come on
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 81 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Photosensor/rain sensor faulty
Automatic headlights / automatic wipers faulty
If the symbol lights up, this means that the photosensor/rain sensor is not
working. For safety reasons, the dipped beam headlights will then be
switched on permanently when the light switch is set to the AUTO position.
However, you can still switch the lights on and off in the normal way with the
light switch. If the rain sensor is faulty, the functions operated via the wind-
screen wiper lever will still be available. You should have the photo-
sensor/rain sensor checked by a specialised workshop as soon as
possible.
Worn brake pads
If the symbol lights up, have the front brake pads (and, for safety reasons,
the rear pads as well) inspected by a qualified workshop.
Speed warning 1
If the symbol lights up, this means you are exceeding the speed that has
been pre-set with the speed warning function. You should reduce your speed
accordingly page 82.
Headlight range control faulty
This symbol indicates a malfunction in the dynamic headlight range
control. Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop to have the dynamic head-
light range control function repaired.
Adaptive headlights* f
Adaptive headlights fa
This symbol indicates tha
the vehicle to a qualified wor
headlight control unit repaire
Washer fluid level low
If the symbol lights up, top
headlight washer system*
Speed warning 2
If the symbol lights up, th
been pre-set. You should red
Battery voltage too hig
If the symbol lights up, ta
the following items checked:
Poly V-belt
Battery condition
It is also advisable to check w
page 69.
Cockpit82
to pressure. The glass can break when you y.
of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must be , there is a risk of death.
tion can help prevent you exceeding
imum speed.
ill warn the driver if a pre-set maximum speed
an warning buzzer signal if the set speed is
Fig. 56 Display: Speed warning function
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 82 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Bulb monitor
The bulb monitor checks whether the lights on the vehicle are
working.
If a defective bulb is detected, or if one of the lights has failed for any reason,
the bulb monitor symbol will appear in the display together with an addi-
tional message (which goes out after 5 seconds). For instance, if the rear left
turn signal is not working, the display in the instrument panel will show the
following message:
Left rear turn signal
The message disappears after 5 seconds. Press the CHECK button briefly if
you wish to call up the message again.
If the display indicates that one of the lights is not working, this can have a
number of causes:
Bulb failure page 267.
A blown fuse page 265, Changing fuses.
Faulty electrical wiring.
It is not necessary to have lamps replaced in a specialised workshop,
however the use of Xenon lamps is recommended.
LED lamps
If any of the LED (Light Emitting Diode) functions fail, the complete lamp
should be replaced.
The failure of the lamp is only shown when the LED function goes out
completely. Sometimes, a LED will stop working, without displaying the
warning as the function continues to operate.
WARNING
Bulbs are highly sensitive touch the bulb, causing injur
The high voltage element handled correctly. Otherwise
Speed warning*
Introduction
The speed warning func
a particular pre-set max
The speed warning function w
is exceeded. The system gives
Cockpit 83
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
n with the speed warning function, it is still
e vehicle's speed with the speedometer and to
s.
rning 1
o set speed limit warning 1.
aximum speed.
n and hold it down until the symbol
ears.
Fig. 57 Detailed view of the instrument panel: CHECK button
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 83 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
exceeded by about 10 km/h. A warning symbol will also appear in the display
fig. 56.
The speed warning function has two different warning speeds, which operate
independently and serve slightly different purposes:
Speed limit warning 1
With speed limit warning 1, the maximum speed can be changed while
driving. The speed limit that has been set remains stored until the ignition is
switched off, or until it is changed or cleared.
The warning symbol for speed limit warning 1 page 82, fig. 56 will
appear in the display if you exceed the pre-set speed. It goes out again if the
speed is reduced below the set speed limit.
The symbol also goes out if the speed is increased to more than about 40
km/h above the set speed for at least 10 seconds. However, this does not
cancel the speed limit that was originally set.
Setting speed limit warning 1 page 83.
Speed limit warning 2
With speed limit warning 2, the speed limit can only be changed or cleared
when the ignition is switched off. You are recommended to store this speed
limit warning if you always wish to be reminded of a particular speed limit.
This could be when driving in countries with general speed limits, or if a
particular speed should not be exceeded when winter tyres are fitted etc.
The speed limit warning symbol for speed warning 2 will appear in the
display if you exceed the pre-set speed. Unlike speed limit warning 1, the
warning symbol only goes out once the road speed has dropped below the
set value again.
Setting speed limit warning 2 page 84.
Note Please bear in mind that, eve
important to keep a eye on th
observe the legal speed limit
Setting speed limit wa
Use the CHECK button t
Setting the speed limit
Drive at the desired m
Press the CHECK butto
page 82, fig. 56 app
Cockpit84
button in the instrument panel
odometer and the digital clock will light
for at least two seconds. The display will
hich is currently set or, if no speed limit
ed out warning symbol for speed limit 2.
it, press the top or bottom of the function
indscreen wiper lever fig. 58. The
ill then increase or decrease by 10 km/h
button in the instrument panel
odometer and the digital clock will light
for at least two seconds. The display will
hich is currently set.
Reset button on the windscreen wiper
l the crossed out warning symbol for
n the display.
ometer and digital clock goes off again a few
eased.
AA
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 84 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Clearing the speed limit
Drive the vehicle at a minimum of 5 km/h.
Press the CHECK button for at least two seconds.
The speed warning symbol lights up briefly in the display when the button
is released to confirm that the selected speed has been stored. The speed
limit that has been selected remains stored until another speed is selected
with a brief push of the button, or until the memory is cleared with a long
push of the button.
Setting speed limit warning 2
Speed limit warning 2 is set using the switches on the wind-
screen wiper lever.
Setting the speed limit
Switch the ignition off.
Briefly press the CHECK
page 83, fig. 57. The
up.
Press the CHECK button
show the speed limit w
has been set, the cross
To change the speed lim
selector switch on the w
speed limit displayed w
at a time.
Clearing the speed limit
Switch the ignition off.
Briefly press the CHECK
page 83, fig. 57. The
up.
Press the CHECK button
show the speed limit w
Now press and hold the
lever fig. 58 unti
speed limit 2 appears o
The display lighting for the od
seconds after the button is rel
Fig. 58 Windscreen wiper lever: Function selector switch
AB
Cockpit 85
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
oard computer 1)
rocesses the information on a journey from the
on until it is switched off. If the journey is
ter the ignition is switched off, the new figures
the calculation. If the journey is interrupted for
d information is automatically erased when you
ard computer 2)
mory, the total-journey memory is not erased
n determine the period for which you wish the
figures.
pty is displayed in km. The distance to empty is
km.
e fuel consumption since the memory was last
tion
taneous fuel consumption in litres/100 km.
y, the computer will display the last value in the
e speed driven since the memory was last
of time which has elapsed since the memory
st possible period it can cover is 999 hours and
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 85 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Onboard computer
Introduction
The onboard computer provides you with useful information
during a journey, including average and current fuel
consumption, average speed, distance to empty, driving time
and distance covered.
Press RESET button page 86, fig. 60 to switch back and forward
between onboard computer functions 1 and 2.
The numbers in the display fig. 59 indicate which of the two memories is
currently in use. A 1 means that the display is showing the information in the
single journey memory (onboard computer 1). A 2 means that the display is
showing the information in the total journey memory (onboard computer 2).
Single-journey memory (onb
The single-journey memory p
time the ignition is switched
resumed within two hours af
are automatically included in
more than two hours the store
resume your journey.
Total-journey memory (onbo
Unlike the single-journey me
automatically. Hence, you ca
onboard computer to supply
Distance to empty
The estimated distance to em
displayed in increments of 10
Average fuel consumption
This mode shows the averag
cancelled in litres/100 km.
Instantaneous fuel consump
The display shows the instan
When the vehicle is stationar
memory.
Average speed
This mode shows the averag
cancelled (in km/h).
Driving time
This display shows the period
was last cancelled. The longe
59 minutes.
Fig. 59 Onboard computer: memory 1
AB
Cockpit86
s controlled by means of two switches
r lever.
mputer
repeatedly until the onboard computer
e 85, fig. 59 is displayed.
of the function selector switch
the functions of the onboard computer in
et button for at least two seconds.
set to zero using the Reset button:
Fig. 60 Windscreen wiper lever: Onboard computer controls
B
AA
AB
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 86 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Driving time warning
After 2 hours of continuous driving, the display automatically switches over
to the driving time display of 2:00. At the same time the driving time display
starts flashing. This is to remind the driver to take a break.
The driving time warning can be switched off by briefly pressing the function
selector switch or the button fig. 60.
If you continue driving or take a break for less than 10 minutes, the driving
time warning will switch on once again when the total driving time is 4:00
hours, 6:00 hours, etc. However, if you take a break for more than 10 minutes,
the driving time warning clock will be erased.
Distance covered
This display shows the distance you have covered since the memory was last
cancelled. The longest possible distance which can be recorded is
9999.9 km.
Note The displays for fuel consumption (average and instantaneous), distance
to empty and speed are shown in metric units.
The information in the memory is lost if the battery is disconnected.
Operation
The onboard computer i
on the windscreen wipe
Activating the onboard co
Press the reset button
(memory 1 or 2) pag
Selecting the function
Press the top or bottom
fig. 60. This displays
sequence.
Resetting to zero
Press and hold the Res
The following values can be re
Reset
A
Cockpit 87
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
Fig. 61 Windscreen wiper lever: Menu selection button
Fig. 62 Display: Main menu
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 87 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Journey duration
Distance covered
Average fuel consumption
Average speed
The onboard computer can only be operated when the ignition is switched on.
When the ignition is switched on, the display shows the function that was last
selected.
As well as the figures from the onboard computer (1 or 2), the display can also
show information from the navigation system*. Press the Reset button
briefly to switch back and forward between these displays.
Note If you keep the Reset button pressed for longer than two seconds, it will
reset the currently displayed figure to zero (for instance average fuel
consumption).
Faults detected by the auto-check control will be displayed even if the
display is off.
The information in the memory is lost if the battery is disconnected.
Menu display
Introduction
AB
Cockpit88
ed up via the button and the
dscreen wiper lever. Use these
and adjust the settings.
fig. 63 and the rocker switch :
until the menu display page 87,
to select one of the menus. Press "up" or
select the options accordingly.
.
Reset
Fig. 63 Windscreen wiper lever: Reset button and rocker switch
AA
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 88 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Some of your vehicle's functions can be adjusted, activated and controlled by
menus. With the aid of the menus you can then also select the information
you wish to see displayed on the DIS display. This is only possible when the
ignition is on. The menu is enabled using the button on the wind-
screen wiper lever page 87, fig. 61.
The main menu lists the different display types (or basic commands):
Programming
Check
Menu off
Help
The main menu options have the following submenus:
Controlling the menu
The menu display is call
rocker switch on the win
controls to make checks
Functions of the
Activating the menu
Press the button
fig. 62 appears.
Selecting and setting
Press the rocker switch
"down" on the switch to
Entering and confirming
Press the button
Programming Clock page 88
Computer page 88
Speed warning page 82
Radio info (on/off)
Units (measuring distance,
fuel consumption, tempera-
ture)
page 88
Language: you can select
one of 6 languages.
page 88
Check Service page 74
Menu off When the menu is switched off, the display shows the
same information as in vehicles without the menu func-
tion.
Help The help function may be used to understand the meaning
of symbols that can appear on different menus.
Reset
Reset AB
Reset
Reset
Cockpit 89
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
will rise accordingly. Therefore, you should only
n they are cold (i.e. approximately at ambient
re monitoring system works reliably, you should
st the tyre pressures at regular intervals and
eference values) in the system.
bel is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.
re when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!
tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and f the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
nvironment creased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
g that the tyres are correctly inflated remains
n only provide assistance.
sted when the tyres are at ambient
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 89 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Use the rocker switch to select the menus and adjust various values. The
selected values are highlighted on a red background.
By pressing the button, you can confirm the option you have selected
or the value you have set. Selected functions are marked with a tick.
The following symbols are used:
Tyre pressure monitoring*
Introduction
The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the
pressure of the tyres.
The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of
symbols and messages in the instrument panel display. The system works
with the help of the ABS sensors in the wheels.
Please bear in mind that the tyre inflation pressure is also influenced by the
temperature of the tyre. Tyre pressure increases about 0.1 bar for each 10 C
in tyre temperature increase. The tyre heats up while the vehicle is being
driven and the tyre pressure
adjust the tyre pressures whe
temperature).
To ensure that the tyre pressu
check and, if necessary, adju
store the correct pressures (r
A tyre pressure information la
WARNING
Never adjust tyre pressu even burst the tyres. Risk of
An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating o bead may be released or the
For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres lead to in
Note Responsibility for ensurin
with the driver; the system ca
Pressure can only be adju
temperature.
Cursor Function selected Red background (active
function)
Tick Selected
Box Not selected
Triangle pointing upwards Previous page
Triangle pointing down-
wards
Next page
Reset
Cockpit90
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 90 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Tyre pressure monitoring display
The tyre pressure should be corrected as soon as possible if
it is too low.
If the symbol appears, the tyre pressure on at least one of the
wheels is too low.
Stop the vehicle.
Check the tyre(s).
Correct the tyre pressure page 246.
For more detailed information on the tyre pressure monitoring system, please
refer to page 245.
Steering wheel controls 91
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
y pressing or scrolling the controls to on
eel fig. 64:
repeatedly to switch between modes, which
er information system fig. 65.
humbwheel to select a function from one of
* for the on-board phone system is enabled by
Pressing the talk button again disables speed
el up/down to increase/decrease the
Fig. 65 Driver informa- tion system
AA AD
B
AA
AD
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 91 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Steering wheel controls
Multifunction steering wheel*
Introduction
You can use the multifunction steering wheel to quickly and
easily operate selected functions of the radio, CD, and tele-
phone*.
The functions are operated b
the multifunction steering wh
Press the button
are then displayed in the driv
Scroll and press the left t
the menus.
The speech control system
pressing the talk button .
control*.
Scroll the right thumbwhe
volume.
Fig. 64 Controls on the multifunction steering wheel
MODE A
AC
Steering wheel controls92
+ - Press
Volume up Volume down MUTE
Volume up Volume down MUTE
Volume up Volume down MUTE
AD
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 92 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Steering wheel audio version controls
(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press
Radio mode
Station search.
Increase frequency
Station search.
Decrease fre-
quency
1st press: starts
the search.
2nd press: cancels
the search
Long press:
block the steering
wheel controls
Short press:
activates the steer-
ing wheel controls (if
they are blocked /
without specific func-
tion (if they are not
blocked)
No function
specified CD/
iPod-USB Mode
CD mode: next
track.
iPod/USB Mode:
next track
CD mode: previ-
ous track.
iPod/USB Mode:
previous track
CD mode: fast for-
ward.
iPod/USB Mode:
fast forward
MP3 mode
Next track Previous track Fast forward
AA AB AC
Steering wheel controls 93
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
+ - Press
Volume up Volume down MUTE
Volume up Volume down MUTE
Volume up Volume down MUTE
Volume up Volume down No function
specified
Volume up Volume down No function
specified
Volume up Volume down No function
specified
Volume up Volume down No function
specified
AD
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 93 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press
Radio mode Station search.
Increase fre-
quency
Station search.
Decrease fre-
quency
1st press: starts
the search.
2nd press: cancels
the search
Change to
phone
Enable voice
recognition
CD/ iPod-USB Mode
CD mode: next
track.
iPod/USB Mode:
next track
CD mode: previ-
ous track.
iPod/USB Mode:
previous track
CD mode: fast for-
ward.
iPod/USB Mode:
fast forward
MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward
Phone mode Next name in
phone book
Previous name in
phone book Accept
Change to
radio / CD /
iPod-USB /
MP3
Incoming call mode
No function spec-
ified
No function
specified
One press: accept
call.
Held down: reject
call
No function
specified
No function
specified
Active call mode
No function spec-
ified
No function
specified End call
No function
specified
No function
specified
Voice activa- tion mode
No function spec-
ified
No function
specified
No function speci-
fied
No function
specified Cancel
AA AB AC
Steering wheel controls94
+ - Press
olume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
olume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
olume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
AD
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 94 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Steering wheel controls, Navigation System* version
(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press
Radio mode Station search.
Increase fre-
quency
Station search.
Decrease fre-
quency
1st press: starts
the search.
2nd press: cancels
the search
No function
specified
No function
specified
V
CD/ iPod-USB Mode
CD mode: next
track.
iPod/USB Mode:
next track
CD mode: previ-
ous track.
iPod/USB Mode:
previous track
CD mode: fast for-
ward.
iPod/USB Mode:
fast forward
V
MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward V
AA AB AC
Steering wheel controls 95
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
+ - Press
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Volume up Volume down No function
specified
AD
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 95 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Steering wheel controls, Navigation System + Telephone* version
(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press
Radio mode Station search.
Increase fre-
quency
Station search.
Decrease fre-
quency
1st press: starts
the search.
2nd press: cancels
the search
Change to
phone
Enable voice
recognition
CD/ iPod-USB Mode
CD mode: next
track.
iPod/USB Mode:
next track
CD mode: previ-
ous track.
iPod/USB Mode:
previous track
CD mode: fast for-
ward.
iPod/USB Mode:
fast forward
MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward
Phone mode Next name in
phone book
Previous name in
phone book Accept
Change to
radio / CD /
iPod-USB /
MP3
Incoming call mode
No function spec-
ified
No function
specified
One press: accept
call.
Held down: reject
call
No function
specified
No function
specified
Active call mode
No function spec-
ified
No function
specified End call
No function
specified
No function
specified
Voice activa- tion mode
No function spec-
ified
No function
specified
No function speci-
fied
No function
specified Cancel
AA AB AC
Unlocking and locking96
our vehicle consists of the following items:
ontrol.
k and unlock the vehicle and start the engine.
. 67 -arrow- to unfold the key out of the handle
ct the Technical Service. Have the remote
abled. You should therefore bring the plastic
with you. It is also important to notify your
the plastic key tab has been lost.
Fig. 67 Remote control key: Release button
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 96 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Unlocking and locking
Remote control keys
Set of keys
The set of keys belonging to y
one remote control key.
one key without remote c
a plastic key tab*.
Remote control key
The remote control key will loc
Press the release button fig
and to fold it back in.
Replacing a key
If you lose a key, please conta
control coding for that key dis
key tab* and all available keys
insurance company if a key or
Fig. 66 Set of keys supplied with the vehicle
AA
AB
AC
Unlocking and locking 97
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
(arrow) flashes when one of the buttons is
does not light up or flash, this means that the
st be replaced.
ge 97.
ery
the batteries changed in a qualified work-
nge the used battery yourself, follow the
e key fig. 69 and the cover
e direction of the arrow.
Fig. 69 Master key: Opening the cover
AA AB
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 97 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause injuries.
Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition key from the lock! Otherwise, the steering lock could engage suddenly, causing an accident.
Indicator light on the remote control key
The condition of the battery in the remote control key is moni-
tored by the indicator light.
Condition of the key battery
The indicator light fig. 68
pressed. If the indicator light
battery is exhausted and mu
Replacing the batteries pa
Replacing the key batt
We recommend you have
shop. If you decide to cha
steps below:
Carefully prise apart th
using a coin.
Remove the cover in th
Fig. 68 LED on the remote control key
Unlocking and locking98
rted using an original SEAT key with the correct
tart the engine with the key if there is another
ake of vehicle on the same key tab.
m enables you to lock and unlock all
nd the tank flap together.
your vehicle locks and unlocks all the doors
sly. The tailgate is unlocked when the vehicle
le must be used to open it. The vehicle can be
e remote control page 105 or by turning the
or.
ally opened or closed using the central locking
oof* can be closed but not opened using the
ombined with an anti-theft security system. If
ey from the outside, the interior opening levers
unauthorised persons from entering the
tem fail to work, you can still normally enable
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 98 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Remove the used battery from the cover.
Insert the new battery. Make sure that the + symbol on the
battery is facing downwards. The correct polarity is indicated on
the cover.
After inserting the battery, align the cover and key and press the
two parts together.
For the sake of the environment Used batteries must be disposed of at an appropriate waste facility or
through an authorised service, given that their components can affect the
environment.
Note The system must be re-synchronised after each battery replacement to be
able to lock and unlock the vehicle using the remote control page 107.
The new battery must be of the same type as the original.
Electronic immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is designed to prevent unauthor-
ised persons from starting up the vehicle.
There is an electronic chip inside the key which automatically deactivates the
immobiliser when the key is inserted into the ignition lock. The electronic
immobiliser is enabled automatically when the ignition key is removed from
the ignition lock after coming to a stop.
If an uncoded key is used, the message SAFE will appear in the trip recorder
display.
Note The engine can only be sta
code.
It may not be possible to s
ignition key from a different m
Central locking
Description
The central locking syste
the doors, the tailgate a
The central locking system on
and the tank flap simultaneou
is opened. However, the hand
locked and unlocked using th
key in the lock in the driver do
The windows can also be centr
system page 111. The sunr
central locking system.
The central locking system is c
the vehicle is locked with the k
stop working, which prevents
vehicle.
Should the central locking sys
all the locks individually.
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ith the key
turn the key in the driver door to position
n the door.
ors, the tailgate and the tank flap simultane-
tem will be disabled.
h the key
n the key in the driver door to position
and the tailgate.
Fig. 70 Turning the key to enable the open and close functions
AB
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 99 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Automatic locking function (Auto Lock)*
The Auto Lock* function automatically locks all doors and the tailgate when
the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h.
The vehicle is unlocked again automatically when the ignition key is
removed. Alternatively, the driver can also unlock the vehicle using the
central locking switch or by opening one of the doors.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Note Should the central locking system fail to work, you can still lock and
unlock the driver door and the tailgate using the key. Locking the doors
manually if central locking fails to work page 102.
The anti-theft mechanism and the anti-theft alarm* cannot be enabled if
the central locking is not working.
Never leave any valuable items in the vehicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a safe.
Unlocking the vehicle w
To unlock the vehicle,
fig. 70.
Pull the handle to ope
This will unlock all the do
ously.
The anti-theft security sys
Locking the vehicle wit
To lock the vehicle, tur
fig. 70 .
This will lock all the doors
AA
Unlocking and locking100
ocked using the central locking system when it
locked separately after it has been closed. This
g locked out of the vehicle.
m can be enabled from inside the
l locking switch on the driver door.
. 71 .
n using the central locking switch to lock your
Fig. 71 Detail of the driver door: Central locking switch
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 100 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
The interior lights are switched off, provided the light switch is in the cour-
tesy light position.
The windows and the sunroof* will close as the key is held in the locking
position.
The anti-theft security system will be enabled immediately.
Locking the vehicle without activating the anti-theft security system
With the anti-theft security system enabled, it is more difficult to break into
the vehicle. If the anti-theft security system has been enabled, the inside
door handles and the central locking switch will not work .
If you are leaving passengers in the vehicle while it is parked, it is possible to
lock the vehicle without activating the anti-theft security system.
To do so, turn the key in the driver door twice in quick succession to position
page 99, fig. 70.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Caution If the driver door is locked using the key while open, the vehicle will be auto-
matically immobilised and the alarm triggered.
Note Please note that when the vehicle is locked without activating the anti-
theft mechanism, the anti-theft alarm* remains operative. You should there-
fore switch off the interior monitoring* before locking the vehicle, as other-
wise the alarm* could be triggered unintentionally.
The driver door cannot be l
is still open. The door must be
helps to prevent you from bein
Central locking switch
The central locking syste
vehicle using the centra
Locking the vehicle
Press button fig
Unlocking the vehicle
Press button .
Please note the following whe
vehicle:
AB
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
g*
king feature allows you to only unlock
tank flap. All other doors and the tail-
and tank flap
e unlock position, or press the unlock
ontrol once.
he tailgate and the tank flap
in five seconds, or press the unlock button
twice within five seconds.
nti-theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you
ithout unlocking the other doors page 107.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 101 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The doors and the tailgate cannot be opened from the outside (for secu-
rity reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside
door handle.
When the driver door is open, it cannot be locked by pressing the central
locking switch and then closing the door. This helps to prevent you from
being locked out of the vehicle. The door has to be locked separately after it
has been closed.
In the event of an accident in which the airbags inflate, doors locked from
the inside will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
WARNING
The central locking switch is still operative when the ignition is switched off. This switch can be used to automatically lock all the doors and the tail- gate. However, since this makes it difficult to enter the vehicle from the outside, you should never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Note The central locking switch inside the vehicle will not be operative if the anti-
theft mechanism has been enabled.
Security central lockin
The security central loc
the driver door and the
gate remain locked.
Unlocking the driver door
Turn the key once to th
button on the remote c
Unlocking all the doors, t simultaneously.
Turn the key twice with
on the remote control
The security system and the a
unlock only the driver door, w
Unlocking and locking102
provided on the front passenger door
sible when the door is open).
o turn the cap slightly and then fold it
lot inside fig. 73 and turn it as far as
egrees to the right (doors on right side)
e left side).
d it can no longer be opened from the outside.
the inside by pulling the door handle. If the
one of the rear doors, the door can be opened
dle once and then opening the door from the
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 102 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Locking the doors manually if the central locking fails to work
Should the central locking system fail to work at any time (for
instance if there is no electrical power supply), each door will
have to be locked separately.
A manual locking device is
and the rear doors (only vi
Open the door.
Use the key fig. 72 t
downwards.
Insert the key into the s
the stop, i.e. about 90 d
or to the left (door on th
Once the door has been close
The door can be opened from
childproof lock is engaged on
by pulling the inside door han
outside.
Fig. 72 Manual locking device
Fig. 73 Activating manual locking
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
, always check that the catch has engaged could open while driving, even if it has been
be completely closed when the vehicle is aust fumes may be drawn into the vehicle.
symbol lights up on the instrument panel
roperly closed when the ignition is switched on
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 103 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Tailgate
Tailgate: opening and closing
Opening the tailgate
Pull on the release lever fig. 74 and lift the tailgate at the same
time.
Then lift up the tailgate. If your vehicle is equipped accordingly,
the tailgate will open automatically*.
Closing the tailgate
Pull down the tailgate and let it drop into the latch .
Use the recessed handle in the interior trim to make it easier to pull down the
tailgate.
WARNING
After closing the tailgate properly. If not, the tailgate locked. Risk of accident!
The tailgate must always moving, otherwise toxic exh Danger of poisoning!
Note The door/tailgate warning
display if the tailgate is not p
page 74.
Fig. 74 Luggage compartment: opening from the outside
Unlocking and locking104
ckrests fig. 75.
ompartment.
-arrow-.
nto the opening fig. 76 -arrow- and
of the arrow in order to release the
r doors
ents the rear doors from being
A1
Fig. 77 Childproof lock on the rear doors
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 104 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Unlocking the tailgate manually
The tailgate can be released manually if it will not open in the
normal way.
Fold down both rear ba
Lean into the luggage c
Lift the cover fig. 76
Insert the screwdriver i
push it in the direction
tailgate.
Childproof lock
Childproof locks on rea
The childproof lock prev
opened from the inside.
Fig. 75 Detail of the rear seats and luggage compartment: access to the emergency release mechanism
Fig. 76 Detail of the tail- gate: emergency unlocking mechanism
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
tances. The range is reduced when the battery
tes a foldaway key that can be used to manually
well as to start the engine.
red or replaced, or if a replacement key is used,
amming by a qualified workshop. Only then will
ontrol again.
relevant authorisation requirements and has
l Approvals Office for Telecommunications of the
All components are marked in accordance with
ts. This certification forms the basis for official
ntries.
matically disabled when the ignition is
e control may be impaired by interference from
.g. from a mobile phone or TV transmitter) if
ncy range.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 105 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The rear doors are equipped with childproof locks. These can be
operated using the ignition key. The childproof locks are only visible
with the doors open.
Activating the childproof lock
Turn the key in the direction of the arrow page 104, fig. 77.
Deactivating the childproof lock
Turn the key in the opposite direction of the arrow.
When the childproof lock is enabled, the inside door handle will not work and
the door can only be opened from the outside.
Remote control key
Description
The remote control key will lock and unlock the vehicle
without having to insert the key in the lock.
The following functions are available:
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the tailgate
All the turn signals will flash as confirmation when the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. Furthermore, the interior lights will automatically light up when the
vehicle is unlocked and go out when the vehicle is locked, provided that the
switches are in the courtesy light position.
The remote control transmitter and the battery are integrated into the handle
of the key. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The maximum range
depends on different circums
starts to lose power.
The remote control incorpora
lock or unlock the vehicle, as
If the receiver has been repai
the system will need re-progr
you be able use the remote c
The remote control meets all
been approved by the Federa
Federal Republic of Germany.
the current legal requiremen
approval for use in other cou
Note The remote control is auto
switched on.
The function of the remot
other nearby radio signals (e
these are in the same freque
Unlocking and locking106
ntral locking* feature, you can unlock just the
y pressing button once or the whole vehicle
en the vehicle is locked to confirm that the
y locked.
g the vehicle, the seat* and mirror* memory
vated. The driver seat and exterior mirrors will
he positions stored in the memory.
ically light up when the vehicle is unlocked and
ked, provided that the switch is in the courtesy
lly children) in the vehicle if it is locked from t security system is enabled, as the doors and
ed from the inside. Locked doors could delay potentially putting lives at risk.
only be used when the doors and the tailgate
not be used when the vehicle is out of sight.
e accidentally triggered and the vehicle locked
on the remote control inside the vehicle
ignition. If this should happen by mistake,
AA
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 106 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the vehicle
Press button fig. 78 for about 1 second.
Locking the vehicle
Press button for about 1 second.
Opening the tailgate
Press button and hold for at least one second.
The turn signals will flash twice as confirmation when you unlock the vehicle.
The vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of the
doors or the tailgate within 60 seconds after unlocking the vehicle with
button . This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the
unlocking button is pressed by mistake.
In vehicles with the security ce driver door and the tank flap b
by pressing the button twice.
The turn signals flash once wh
doors and tailgate are properl
Moreover, apart from unlockin
programmed in the key is acti
be automatically adjusted to t
The interior lights will automat
go out when the vehicle is loc
light position.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especia the outside and the anti-thef windows cannot then be open assistance in an emergency,
Note The remote control should
are closed.
The remote control should
The anti-theft alarm* can b
if you press the locking button
before inserting the key in the
press the unlock button .
Fig. 78 Remote control key: Control buttons
AA
AB
AC
AA
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
isabled when the vehicle is unlocked using the
ill lock again automatically if none of the doors
after pressing the remote control button.
urning the key in the driver door, all the other
nk flap will remain locked.
ed with the key in the driver door, the key must
k and the ignition switched on within 15
in order to disable the alarm. The alarm will be t switched on within 15 seconds.
r the alarm?
icle are monitored when the vehicle is locked:
net)
ction)
-fitted SEAT radio)
red, the alarm will be triggered.
f by unlocking the vehicle using the remote
e ignition with the key, thus disabling the
also switch off when it comes to the end of its
when the vehicle is locked to confirm that the
the tailgate are properly closed and locked.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 107 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Re-synchronising
Should the remote control fail to lock or unlock the vehicle,
the system must be re-synchronised.
If the vehicle is locked, use the key to unlock the driver door.
Press the unlock button on the remote control.
Insert the key into the ignition and switch on the ignition.
Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
Press the unlock or the lock button .
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description
The system triggers an alarm if anyone attempts to break into
the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm helps to prevent the vehicle being broken into or stolen.
If the system senses interference with the vehicle, it triggers an audible and
visible alarm.
How is the system enabled?
The anti-theft alarm system is enabled automatically when the vehicle is
locked with the remote control or by turning the key in the driver door (if the
door is closed). The anti-theft alarm is enabled about 30 seconds after the
vehicle is locked.
How is the system disabled?
The anti-theft alarm is only d
remote control. The vehicle w
is opened within 60 seconds
If the vehicle is unlocked by t
doors, the tailgate and the ta
If the vehicle has been unlock
be inserted in the ignition loc
seconds of opening the door
triggered if the ignition is no
When does the system trigge
The following parts of the veh
Engine compartment (bon
Luggage compartment
Doors
Tilt angle (tow-away prote
Ignition
Radio (only with a factory
Interior page 108
If any of these areas are ente
How is the alarm disabled?
The alarm can be switched of
control, or by switching on th
alarm system. The alarm will
cycle.
Turn signals
The turn signals flash briefly
doors, the engine bonnet and
Unlocking and locking108
triggers an alarm if it detects move-
erior monitoring if there is a possibility
ggered, e.g. by a pet or by an object
. The tow-away protection feature,
alarm system, should be disabled if the
ransported (e.g. by rail or ship).
onitoring
out the switch (with the symbol ) to
compartment, in the driver door
Fig. 79 Interior moni- toring switch
AA
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 108 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
If the turn signals do not flash, check the doors, the bonnet and the tailgate
to make sure they are properly closed. The turn signals will also flash briefly
if one of the doors or the tailgate or engine bonnet is closed after the alarm
system has been enabled.
LED
When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver door trim will flash
rapidly for about 30 seconds and then continue flashing slowly. This is to
indicate that the anti-theft alarm system (including the interior monitoring
and tow-away protection) is operative. If the LED lights up continuously for
about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked instead of flashing, this means
the alarm system is not working properly.
Note To make sure that the alarm is fully operative when leaving the vehicle,
briefly check that all the doors and windows and the sunroof* are closed.
The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
nected while the alarm system is enabled.
Interior monitoring*
The interior monitoring
ment inside the vehicle.
You should disable the int
that the alarm could be tri
moving inside the vehicle
which is integrated into the
vehicle is being towed or t
Deactivating the interior m
Open the door and pull
one side of the storage
fig. 79.
Then lock the vehicle.
Unlocking and locking 109
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ndows
driver door window
enger door window.
dows
or window
oor window
you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only time. This is particularly important if there are ey might otherwise be able to start the engine
Fig. 80 Detail of the driver door: Control switches
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 109 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Deactivating the tow-away protection
Open the door and pull out switch (with the symbol ) to one
side of the storage compartment, in the driver door page 108,
fig. 79.
Then lock the vehicle.
The LED on switch will light up when the interior monitoring is disabled.
The LED on the top of the driver door trim will also light up for about 3
seconds. When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver door trim
will flash rapidly for about 3 seconds. About 30 seconds later it starts flashing
slowly. The interior monitoring is automatically enabled again the next time
the vehicle is locked.
The LED on switch will light up when the tow-away protection function is
disabled. The LED on the top of the driver door trim will also light up for about
3 seconds. When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver door
trim will flash rapidly for about 3 seconds. The tow-away protection is auto-
matically enabled again the next time the vehicle is locked.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Electric windows
Control switches
Switches for front electric wi
Switch fig. 80 for the
Switch for the front pass
Switches for rear electric win
Switch for the rear left do
Switch for the rear right d
Safety switch
WARNING
Always take the key with intend to be gone for a short children in the vehicle, as th
AB
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
Unlocking and locking110
, fig. 80 can deactivate the rear door
ly be operated from the rear when the safety
safety switch when the electric windows in the
h not pressed in).
ut ten minutes after the ignition has been
ow switches are only disabled when the driver
or is opened.
assenger's door and rear doors
a switch for its own window.
ontrolled by two-stage switches:
AE
Fig. 81 Switch on front passenger door
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 110 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause injuries. The electric window switches are only disabled when the driver door or the front passenger door is opened.
Never close the windows in a careless or uncontrolled manner, as there is a risk of causing injuries.
When locking the vehicle from the outside, make sure that nobody is inside the vehicle, as the windows cannot be opened from the inside in an emergency.
Switches in the driver door
The driver can operate all the electric windows in the vehicle.
The electric windows are controlled by two-stage switches:
Opening the windows
Press the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the
window has moved to the desired position.
Press the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will
automatically open all the way.
Closing the windows
Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the window
has moved to the desired position.
Pull the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will
automatically close all the way.
Safety switch
The safety switch page 109
switches. The windows can on
switch is pressed in.
The symbol lights up on the
rear doors are disabled (switc
Note The windows will work for abo
switched off. The electric wind
door or the front passenger do
Switches on the front p
Each of these doors has
The electric windows are c
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking 111
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ng the ignition key
with the key and hold the key in the unlock
indows are open.
g the remote control
k button until all windows are closed
g the ignition key
ith the key and hold the key in the lock
indows are closed .
when you release the remote control button or
position in the door lock.
the windows to ensure nobody is hurt.
hould only use the remote control open and t 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, indows when pressing the button to close ving as soon as the button is released.
nction not working
e function will not work if the battery has been
e function can be restored as follows:
s it will go by lifting and holding the window
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 111 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Opening the windows
Press the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the
window has moved to the desired position.
Press the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will
automatically open all the way.
Closing the windows
Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the window
has moved to the desired position.
Pull the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will
automatically close all the way.
Note The windows will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been
switched off. The electric window switches are only disabled when one of the
front doors is opened.
Opening and closing the windows using the central locking function
The windows can be opened or closed simultaneously when
the vehicle is unlocked or locked.
Opening the windows using the remote control
Press and hold the unlock button on the remote control until
the windows reach the desired position.
Opening the windows usi
Unlock the driver door
position until all the w
Closing the windows usin
Press and hold the loc
.
Closing the windows usin
Lock the driver door w
position until all the w
The windows will stop moving
turn the key back to its initial
WARNING
Be careful when closing
For safety reasons, you s close functions within abou always keep an eye on the w them. The windows stop mo
Possible malfunctions
Automatic open and close fu
The automatic open and clos
temporarily disconnected. Th
Close the window as far a
switch.
Unlocking and locking112
ess wind noise if it is opened in the
engages at position fig. 82. The
pen as far as the convenience position
ss wind noise.
ion and hold it until the sunroof
ition. This position can cause more wind
tion .
Fig. 82 Detail of head- liner: Sliding/tilting sunroof control
A1
A2
A0
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 112 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Release the switch and then lift it again for one second. This will re-enable
the automatic function.
Sliding/tilting sunroof*
Description
The sliding/tilting sunroof is operated using the rotary knob fig. 82. The
rotary knob for sliding the roof open can be adjusted to several different
settings (with click stops). This knob only works when the ignition is switched
on. The rotary knob must be in the position if you want to tilt the roof up
at the rear.
The sunroof will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been
switched off. However, it is immediately disabled when one of the front doors
is opened.
Opening/Tilting
The sunroof will create l
convenience position.
Convenience position
Turn the control until it
sunroof will now only o
which means there is le
Opening completely
Turn the switch to posit
reaches the desired pos
noise.
Tilting open
Turn the control to posi
A0
Unlocking and locking 113
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
unroof. There is a risk of suffering injury. For the ignition key when leaving the vehicle.
on
closed from outside the vehicle.
on the driver door and hold it in the lock
ck button on the remote control until the
the way .
unroof. There is a risk of suffering injury.
power the air conditioner fan.
in the same way as the normal sliding/tilting
e solar sunroof and cannot be opened and
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 113 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
With the control in position 0, press the control briefly to make
the roof tilt open all the way.
To open the roof as far as an intermediate setting, press and hold
the control until the roof has moved to the desired position.
When you release the switch it will automatically spring back from position
to position .
The sliding sun blind in the headliner automatically opens when the sunroof
is slid open. If required, it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
It is advisable to close the sun blind when the vehicle is left standing in the
sun. It is important to remember to close the sunroof when parking the
vehicle or if it suddenly starts raining, especially when the sun blind is
closed.
For further information on the automatic close function, see page 113.
Closing
Closing
Turn the control to position page 112, fig. 82 to close the
sunroof .
Closing the sunroof from the tilt position
Pull the specially formed rear end of the control and hold it until
the sunroof has moved down to the desired position.
Pull the switch briefly to lower the sunroof automatically to the
fully closed position. If required, the sunroof can be stopped in
any position by briefly pulling the control again .
WARNING
Take care when closing the s this reason, always take out
Automatic close functi
The sunroof can also be
Turn the key in the lock
position or press the lo
sunroof has closed all
WARNING
Take care when closing the s
Solar sunroof*
The solar cells in the sunroof
The solar sunroof is operated
sunroof.
The interior trim is fixed to th
closed separately.
A2 A1
A0
Unlocking and locking114
nually
ed by hand if the electrical system
Fig. 83 Detail of head- liner: Points for applying screwdriver
Fig. 84 Detail of head- liner: Crank handle for manual operations
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 114 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Emergency electrical activation
In an emergency it is possible to close the sunroof electroni-
cally.
The sliding sunroof mechanism is equipped with a safety cut-out. If
the roof should fail to close normally, it can be closed with the emer-
gency function.
Turn the control to position page 112, fig. 82.
Pull on the control switch until the roof closes.
WARNING
Take care when closing the sunroof. There is a risk of suffering injury. For this reason, always take out the ignition key when leaving the vehicle.
Closing the sunroof ma
The sunroof can be clos
should fail to operate.
A0
Unlocking and locking 115
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 115 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Carefully insert the flat end of a screwdriver (from the vehicle's
tool kit) at the rear of the glass cover on the interior light
page 114, fig. 83.
Carefully lever off the glass cover.
Take the crank handle from its mounting on the inside of the fuse
box cover page 265.
Insert the crank handle all the way into the hexagonal socket
page 114, fig. 84.
Hold the crank handle in position and turn it to close the sunroof.
Reinstall the glass cover: insert the plastic lugs first and then
press the cover upwards.
Have the fault repaired.
Note You can use the screwdriver handle to make it easier to turn the crank. Detach
the handle from the screwdriver and then fit the handle onto the crank.
A1
A2
Lights and visibility116
ver forward page 123.
position O.
icles for countries where daytime running
vehicles with AFS headlights, daytime running
the ignition. Daytime running lights have main
ot the dipped beam headlight function
ill only work with the ignition on. The head-
ed to side lights after the ignition has been
beam headlights are turned on, the symbol
lights switch.
the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
ver door is opened.
requirements when using the signalling and
re.
ditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
rn signals may be temporarily misted. This has
of the lighting system. By switching on the
the beam of light is projected will quickly be
may continue to be misted.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 116 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Lights and visibility
Lights
Lights: switching on and off
Switching on the side lights
Turn the light switch fig. 85 to position .
Switching on dipped or main beam headlights (driving lights)
Dipped beam headlights
Turn the lights switch to position .
Main beam headlights
Turn the lights switch to position .
Press the main beam le
Switching off the lights
Turn the light switch to
Daytime running lights: In veh
lights are obligatory and in all
lights are turned on or off with
beam flashers, as usual, but n
The dipped beam headlights w
lights are automatically switch
switched off.
If the side lights or the dipped
will come on together with the
Note If the lights are left on after
a buzzer sounds when the dri
Observe all relevant legal
lighting systems described he
Depending on weather con
lights, the tail lights and the tu
no influence on the useful life
lights, the area through which
demisted. However, the edges
Fig. 85 Detailed view of the dash panel: Light switch
Lights and visibility 117
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
hile using the automatic headlights function
ving through a tunnel), but do not disable them
headlights will come on the next time the lights
n. To be able to use the main beam headlights
main beam lever back to the "off" position and
"on".
g lights and rear fog light can still be switched
y by using lights switch page 116.
th sensors that measure the ambient light. The
be switched on automatically if the available
preset value (for instance when driving through
s switch off again automatically when the light
am headlights are only intended to assist the m headlights do not relieve the driver of his or
them and turn off or turn on the lights manu- lighting conditions. The light sensors are, for in and fog - you should therefore always switch hts manually in these conditions and when
l requirements when using the signalling and here.
itching is activated, when the ignition is turned
ts are turned off, and when the key is removed
ts are turned off.
type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so
so could prevent the automatic dipped beam
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 117 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Automatic headlight switch* (sensor-controlled)
If you set the light switch to AUTO, the dipped headlights
will switch on and off automatically according to the ambient
light level.
Turning on dipped beam headlights
Turn the light switch fig. 86 to the AUTO position.
Turning off dipped beam headlights
Turn the light switch to position O.
The symbol on the switch lights up when the switch is in the AUTO position.
The dipped beams, side lights, tail lights and number plate lights come on
together when the headlights are switched on automatically.
When you are using the automatic headlights switch, you can also operate
the main beam headlights, however, please note the following: If you enable
the main beam headlights w
during the day (e.g. when dri
again, only the dipped beam
are automatically switched o
again, you must first pull the
then push it forward again to
The side lights, headlights, fo
on manually in the normal wa
The interior mirror is fitted wi
dipped beam headlights will
light drops below the factory
a tunnel, etc.). The headlight
level increases .
WARNING
The automatic dipped be driver. Automatic dipped bea her responsibility to control ally according to weather or example, unable to detect ra on the dipped beam headlig driving after dark.
Observe all relevant lega lighting systems described
Note If automatic headlight sw
off the dipped beam headligh
from the ignition the side ligh
If you have to attach any
in front of the sensors. Doing
Fig. 86 Detailed view of the dash panel: Light switch
Lights and visibility118
h page 116, fig. 85 to the position
witch to the second stop to switch on
the switch will light up when the rear fog light
avan equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle
acket*, only the rear fog light on the trailer or
hind you, the rear fog light should only be used
ations.
A2
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 118 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
headlight or anti-dazzle function from working correctly or even from working
at all.
The warning symbol will appear on the instrument panel if a malfunc-
tion occurs page 81.
Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and
lighting systems described here.
Front fog lights
The light switch can also be used to turn on the front fog
lights.
Switching on the front fog lights
Do page 116, fig. 85 not turn the light switch to the symbol
.
First turn the light switch to the position or .
Then pull the light switch out to the first stop .
The front fog light symbol next to the switch will light up when the front fog
lights are on.
Rear fog light
The light switch can also be used to turn on the rear fog light.
Do page 116, fig. 85 not turn the light switch to the symbol
.
First turn the light switc
or .
Then pull out the light s
the rear fog light.
The symbols and next to
is switched on.
If you are towing a trailer or car
with a factory-fitted towing br caravan will light up.
Caution To avoid dazzling the traffic be
in accordance with legal regul
A1
Lights and visibility 119
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
n to prevent the setting from being
lly.
home functions are controlled by light sensors
. The system will function when the following
n 1.
nition are switched off.
ors register little or no light.
and it is dark, the corresponding exterior lights
er door is opened.
n for up to a maximum of 2 minutes as long as
te is open.
about 30 seconds to light up the area around
and the tailgate have been closed.
et, but you can have it changed by a qualified
quirements (max. setting is 60 seconds).
ed on when the vehicle is unlocked with the
key.
n the driver door is opened or after 60 seconds
again automatically page 106.
emove the key from the ignition, as the lights home function is activated. This will lead to le breakdown.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 119 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Coming home and leaving home functions*
The coming home and leaving home functions are used to
light up the surroundings in the dark. The front fog lights, the
rear side lights and the number plate light switch on.
Activating the function
Briefly press the knob fig. 87 to release it from its set position.
Turn the knob to position 1.
Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being
changed unintentionally.
Deactivating the function
Briefly press the knob fig. 87 to release it from its set position.
Turn the knob to position 0.
Press the knob in agai
changed unintentiona
The coming home and leaving
in the interior mirror housing
requirements are met:
The knob is set to positio
The headlights and the ig
Dark conditions; the sens
Coming home
When the system is enabled
switch on as soon as the driv
The exterior lights will stay o
one of the doors or the tailga
The exterior lights stay on for
the vehicle after all the doors
This time interval is factory-s
workshop to suit your own re
Leaving home
The exterior lights are switch
button on the remote control
The exterior lights go out whe
when the vehicle locks itself
WARNING
Before leaving the vehicle, r will not go out if the coming battery discharge and vehic
Fig. 87 Detailed view of the dash panel: Coming home and leaving home functions
Lights and visibility120
ncrease the brightness.
duce the brightness.
lays will adjust automatically, depending on
hed on
switched on, the brightness of the instrument
onsole lighting can be varied by pressing the
eadlights are switched on, the range
adjusted to suit the load of the
Fig. 89 Headlight range control
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 120 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Note If you always wish to use the coming home and leaving home functions,
you can leave them permanently switched on. As the system is controlled via
a photosensor, it will only work in dark conditions.
Permanent use of the coming home and leaving home functions, particu-
larly on short journeys, will increase the load on the battery. To make sure the
battery is always sufficiently charged, occasionally drive longer distances.
If the fog lights have been switched on by the coming home and leaving
home functions, they will always be switched off when you switch on the igni-
tion.
Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and
lighting systems described here.
Instrument lighting
The brightness of the instrument lighting, displays and
centre console lighting can be varied as required.
Press the button to i
Press the button to re
With the ignition switched on
The lighting of the digital disp
the ambient light.
With the vehicle's lights switc
When the vehicle's lights are
lighting, displays and centre c
and buttons.
Headlight range control
When the dipped beam h
of the headlights can be
vehicle.
Fig. 88 Instrument panel lighting
+
-
+ -
Lights and visibility 121
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
*
hts turn on automatically when the
fig. 90 to release it from its set position.
on 1.
n to prevent the setting from being
lly.
fig. 90 to release it from its set position.
on 0.
Fig. 90 Daytime running lights switch
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 121 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Briefly press the knob page 120, fig. 89 to release it from
its set position.
Turn the knob to the required setting.
Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being
changed unintentionally.
Settings
The settings roughly correspond to the following load conditions:
Two front occupants, luggage compartment empty
All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty
All seats occupied, luggage compartment loaded
Driver only, luggage compartment loaded
Caution Always adjust the headlights to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Make sure
you lower the headlights when the vehicle is more heavily laden.
Dynamic headlight range control
On vehicles with xenon lamps, the headlights automatically adapt to suit the
load being carried when the ignition is switched on and when the vehicle is
moving, depending on the load of the vehicle and the type of driving (e.g.
when accelerating and braking).
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lig
ignition is switched on.
Activating the function
Briefly press the knob
Turn the knob to positi
Press the knob in agai
changed unintentiona
Deactivating the function
Briefly press the knob
Turn the knob to positi
AO
A1
A2
A3
Lights and visibility122
ives better illumination of the curve area and
ing around a bend fig. 91. The dynamic
tomatically depending on the speed and the
re regulated automatically when you drive
how far you turn the steering wheel. The two
rent angles to avoid that the front of the vehicle
eed of about 10 km/h.
ts are used to draw the attention of
vehicle in emergencies.
Fig. 92 Centre console: Switch for hazard warning lights
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 122 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being
changed unintentionally.
This button activates or deactivates the daytime running lights function. With
the function activated, when the ignition is switched on the daytime running
lights are turned on automatically.
Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your
country.
Adaptive headlights* (for driving around bends)
When driving around bends, the headlights will light the
most important areas of the road.
The dynamic cornering light g
the side of the road when driv
cornering light is controlled au
steering wheel angle.
The dipped beam headlights a
around a bend, depending on
main headlights move at diffe
is left completely in the dark.
Note The system operates from a sp
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning ligh
other road users to your
Fig. 91 Adaptive head- lights when driving
Lights and visibility 123
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ain beam headlight lever
in beam headlight lever also operates
the headlight flasher.
beam headlight lever has the following
ay up to indicate right or all the way down
3.
own just as far as the point of resistance
urn signals flash for as long as you hold
when changing a lane).
p or down as far as the point of resistance
briefly (the turn signals flash three times).
Fig. 93 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 123 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Press the switch page 122, fig. 92 to switch the hazard
warning lights on or off.
All four turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. The turn signal indicators and the hazard warning light
indicator flash at the same time. The hazard warning lights also work
when the ignition is switched off.
In an accident in which the airbags are triggered, the hazard warning lights
are switched on automatically.
Note You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, e.g.
When reaching the tail end of a traffic jam
If your vehicle breaks down or there is an emergency
If your vehicle is being towed away or if you are towing another vehicle
Turn signal and m
The turn signal and ma
the parking lights and
The turn signal and main
functions:
Turn signals
Move the lever all the w
to indicate left fig. 9
Move the lever up or d
and hold it there: the t
the lever (for instance
Move the lever briefly u
and release it to signal
Lights and visibility124
dlights or the headlight flasher if this would
glove compartment light
so incorporates the reading lights for
r.
. 94 for the front interior light has the
Fig. 94 Detail of head- liner: front interior lights
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 124 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Main beam headlights
Press the lever forward to switch on the main beams.
Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head-
lights off again.
Headlight flasher
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the flasher.
Parking light
Switch the ignition off.
Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand
parking lights respectively.
Notes on these functions
The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The turn
signal lamp or flashes in the instrument panel when the turns signals
page 65 are working.
The turn signals are cancelled automatically when the steering wheel is
returned to the straight-ahead position.
The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The main beam headlight indicator lamp then
comes on in the instrument panel.
The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever, even if no
other lights are switched on. The main beam headlight indicator lamp
then comes on in the instrument panel.
When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the tail light
on one side of the vehicle light up with reduced intensity. The parking lights
will only work with the ignition off.
Caution Never use the main beam hea
dazzle oncoming traffic.
Interior lights
Front interior lights and
The front interior light al
the driver and passenge
The rocker switch fig
following functions:
AA
Lights and visibility 125
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
automatically adjusted by a dimmer when they
uminates a number of important
s come on automatically when the ignition is
creen* also comes on when the side lights or
he centre console is illuminated from above.
be switched off manually.
Fig. 95 Detail of head- liner: ambient lighting
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 125 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Door light position
Move switch to the centre position.
Interior light switched on
Move switch to position I.
Interior light switched off
Move switch to position O.
Front reading lights
Press one of the switches to turn the left and right reading
lights on and off.
Glove compartment light
Open the glove compartment on the front passenger side. The
glove compartment light will come on automatically if the side
lights or headlights are switched on, and will go out again when
the glove compartment is closed.
Footwell* and door lighting
This is switched on when the doors are opened and off when they
are closed.
If the switch is in the courtesy light position, the interior light comes on auto-
matically when the vehicle is unlocked or the doors are opened. The light also
comes on when the key is pulled out of the ignition. The light turns off about
30 seconds after closing the doors. The interior light is switched off immedi-
ately when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.
If a door is left open, the light is switched off after about 10 minutes to
prevent the battery from running flat.
The brightness of the lights is
are switched on.
Ambient lighting*
The ambient lighting ill
controls.
The lights in the door handle
switched on.
The lighting above the winds
headlights are switched on. T
The ambient lighting cannot
AA
AA
AA
AB
Lights and visibility126
lighting
f the luggage compartment.
n automatically when the tailgate is opened.
t is switched off automatically if the tailgate is
10 minutes.
Fig. 97 Detailed view of the top of the luggage compartment: luggage compartment lighting
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 126 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Rear reading lights
The reading lights are switched on and off with the switches .
Luggage compartment
The light is in the upper part o
The light fig. 97 switches o
The luggage compartment ligh
left open for more than about
Fig. 96 Detail of head- liner: rear reading lights
Lights and visibility 127
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
not activated in temperatures above approxi-
nvironment dow as soon as the rear window has demisted.
u can also save fuel.
rove visibility and contribute to safety.
er and the front passenger can be pulled out of
of the vehicle and turned towards the doors
visor have covers. On opening the cover , the
adliner is automatically switched on. The light
Fig. 99 Sun visor
A2
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 127 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Visibility
Heated rear window
The rear window heating clears the rear window of condensa-
tion.
Press button to switch the rear window heating on or off
fig. 98.
The heated rear window only works when the ignition is switched on. An indi-
cator lamp on the button lights up when the rear window heater is switched
on.
The heated rear window switches off automatically after about 10 minutes if
the outside temperature is above 0 C.
Depending on the outside temperature, the exterior mirrors are also heated
while the heated rear window is turned on.
The exterior mirror heating is
mately 20 C.
For the sake of the e Switch off the heated rear win
By saving electrical power yo
Sun visors
The sun visors can imp
The sun visors for the driv
their mountings in the centre
fig. 99.
The vanity mirrors in the sun
mirror light* located in the he
Fig. 98 Switch for heated rear window
A1
Lights and visibility128
s
ver controls the windscreen wipers
and wipe.
r fig. 101 has the following settings:
position to give the windscreen a
n sensor * (activate)
sition .
or down to set the wiper intervals.
Fig. 101 Windscreen wiper lever
A1
A2
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 128 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
switches itself off when the cover is closed and when the sun visor is pushed
back up.
Sun blind*
The rear side windows are fitted with sun blinds.
Sun blind (rear side windows)
Pull out the blind and hook it into the hooks at the top of the door
frame fig. 100.
Windscreen wiper
Windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper le
and the automatic wash
The windscreen wiper leve
Short wipe
Move the lever down to
short wipe.
Intermittent wipe / Rai
Move the lever up to po
Move the switch up
Fig. 100 Sun blind extended to cover rear side window
AA
Lights and visibility 129
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ction in the intermittent wipe position. The inter-
led automatically when it starts to rain.
was in the intermittent wipe position when the
or will not activate until you reach a speed of 6
itivity of the rain sensor*.
nsitivity level for the rain sensor the windscreen
y moisture on the windscreen.
rmittent wipe setting are also varied automati-
eed (in addition to the sensitivity setting).
safe driving, the wiper must be in perfect re to do so could result in an accident.
intended to assist the driver. The driver is still the windscreen wipers as required depending
nt coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility , low sun or when driving at night, these coat- zzle, which is a serious safety hazard. Such wiper blades to make noise.
k that the wiper blade has not frozen before acti-
. Should the windscreen wiper system be
zen, this could damage it or even the wind-
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 129 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
In vehicles equipped with a rain sensor*, you can move the
switch up and down to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Slow wipe
Move the lever up to position .
Continuous wipe
Move the lever up to position .
Automatic wash and wipe
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel, , to activate the
windscreen washer.
Release the lever. The washer will stop and the wipers will keep
running for approximately 4 seconds.
Deactivating the windscreen wiper
Pull the lever to basic position .
General notes
The washers and wipers will work only when the ignition is switched on.
If you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights, the wiper speed will automatically be
reduced. The rain sensor* will automatically be set to the intermittent wipe
function.
The windscreen washer jets are heated when the ignition is switched on.
The wiper intervals in the intermittent wipe setting are also varied automati-
cally according to the road speed (in addition to the manual delay setting).
When the lights are switched on you should only pull the lever briefly to wash
the windscreen, otherwise the headlight washers* will also be enabled. This
will use an unnecessary amount of fluid from the reservoir.
Rain sensor
The rain sensor* will only fun
mittent wipe function is enab
If the windscreen wiper lever
ignition was off, the rain sens
km/h.
Use switch to set the sens
If you have selected a high se
wipers will react sooner to an
The wiper intervals in the inte
cally according to the road sp
WARNING
For correct visibility and condition page 218. Failu
The rain sensor* is only obliged to manually operate on visibility.
Do not use water-repelle conditions such as light rain ings can cause increased da coatings can also cause the
Caution In the event of frost, chec
vating the windscreen wipers
enabled when the blade is fro
screen wiper system motor.
AA
A3
A4
A5
A0
AA
Lights and visibility130
the automatic wash/wipe system are
iper lever forwards until it clicks into the
. The rear window wiper will wipe the
every 4 seconds.
to position . The rear window wiper
u hold the lever in this position.
ear window wiper will keep working for
s.
ipe function
s until it returns to its original position.
rt working automatically if reverse gear is
wipers are switched on.
driving, the wiper must be in perfect condition could result in an accident.
k that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
een wipers/rear window wiper. The windscreen
dscreen wiper motor could be damaged if you
ar window wiper with the blades frozen to the
A1
A2
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 130 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Make sure you switch off the windscreen wiper system (lever in position
0) before you use an automatic car wash. This will avoid inadvertent trig-
gering of the wipers and possible damage to the wiper system.
Note Check that the washer fluid reservoir is full before starting a long journey.
Fill the reservoir page 236.
Worn or dirty wiper blades can cause smearing on the glass which can
also impair the effectiveness of the rain sensor*. Check the condition of wind-
screen wiper blades at regular intervals.
Rear window wiper
The windscreen wiper lever also operates the rear window
wiper and the automatic wash/wipe.
The rear window wiper and
switched on as follows:
Intermittent wipe
Push the windscreen w
first position fig. 102
window approximately
Automatic wash/wipe
Push the lever forwards
will work for the time yo
Release the lever. The r
approximately 4 second
Deactivating the interval w
Pull the lever backward
The rear window wiper will sta
engaged while the windscreen
WARNING
For correct visibility and safe page 218. Failure to do so
Caution In icy conditions, always chec
glass before using the windscr
wiper blades and even the win
start the windscreen wipers/re
glass.
Fig. 102 Windscreen wiper lever
Lights and visibility 131
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
nual anti-dazzle setting
ottom of the mirror forwards.
e interior mirror
ottom of the mirror to the rear.
omatic anti-dazzle adjustment*
le function can be switched on and off
Fig. 104 Interior mirror with anti-dazzle setting: Indicator lamp and on/off switch
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 131 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Headlight washer system
With the lights switched on, operate the automatic wash and wipe
page 128, fig. 101 , and keep the lever pulled towards you for
at least 1 second.
The headlight washer jets come out of the bumper automatically (under water
pressure) fig. 103.
Clean off dirt (insects, etc.) from the lenses at regular intervals, for instance
when filling the tank.
To ensure that the system works properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders
free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer spray.
Rear view mirrors
Interior mirror with ma
Normal setting
Point the lever at the b
Anti-dazzle setting for th
Point the lever at the b
Interior mirror with aut
The automatic anti-dazz
as desired.
Fig. 103 Headlight with extended washer jet
A5
Lights and visibility132
broken mirror can cause damage to plastic
ilar to remove the fluid as soon as possible.
tic anti-dazzle function* will only work properly
indow is retracted and if there are no other
reaching the mirror.
e of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
could prevent the automatic headlight or anti-
correctly or even from working at all.
adjusted electrically.
Fig. 105 Detailed view of the armrest: Adjuster knob
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 132 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Switching off the anti-dazzle function
Press button page 131, fig. 104. Indicator lamp goes
off.
Switching on the anti-dazzle function
Press button page 131, fig. 104. Indicator lamp turns
on.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.
The green indicator lamp lights up in the mirror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior mirror will darken auto-
matically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle function
is disabled if:
the interior lighting is switched on
reverse gear is engaged
Sensors for automatic headlights*
When the light switch is set to the AUTO position, the dipped beam head-
lights are switched on and off automatically according to the ambient light
level with the aid of the sensors located in the interior mirror page 117.
WARNING
Electrolyte fluid can leak from a broken mirror. This fluid can cause irrita- tion to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. Wash thoroughly with clean water should you come into contact with this fluid. Seek medical assist- ance if needed!
Caution Electrolyte fluid leaking from a
surfaces. Use a sponge or sim
Note The interior mirror automa
if the sun blind* for the rear w
objects preventing light from
If you have to stick any typ
front of the sensors. Doing so
dazzle function from working
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors are
AA AB
AA AB
Lights and visibility 133
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
eric* mirrors increase the field of vision,
ller and further away in the mirrors. Therefore,
mirrors for judging the distance of vehicles
gs is knocked out of position (e.g. when
st be fully retracted with the electric control. Do
ng by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror
ver fails to operate, the mirrors can be adjusted
e edge of the mirror glass.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 133 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Turn the adjuster knob to position page 132, fig. 105 (left
exterior mirror) or position (right exterior mirror).
Move the knob as required to adjust the exterior mirror for a good
view behind you.
Retracting both exterior mirrors
Turn the knob to position .
It is advisable to fold the exterior mirrors, for example when parking or when
driving through narrow spaces.
Heated mirrors
The mirrors are heated (depending on the outside temperature) when the
heated rear window page 127 is switched on.
The exterior mirror heating is not activated in temperatures above approxi-
mately 20 C.
Memory for exterior mirrors*
In vehicles with memory function for the driver seat, the setting of the exterior
mirrors is automatically stored together with the seat position page 138.
Tilting function for exterior mirror on the passenger side* (only if equipped with memory for exterior mirrors)
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror surface tilts slightly downwards,
provided the mirror control is switched to the exterior mirror on the passenger
side (knob in position page 132, fig. 105). This provides a better view
of the kerb when parking.
The mirror returns to its original position as soon as reverse gear is disen-
gaged and the vehicle is driven forwards at a speed above 15 km/h, or when
the mirror control is turned to position or to the neutral position .
Caution Rear view convex or asph
although objects appear sma
you should not rely on these
behind.
If one of the mirror housin
parking), the mirrors must fir
not readjust the mirror housi
adjuster function.
Note If the electrical adjustment e
by hand by lightly pressing th
AL
AR
AA
AR
AL A0
Seats and storage compartments134
rds and backwards
106 and move the seat to the desired
and move the seat further until the
moved forwards and backwards when the ure to do so could result in an accident.
ht*
106 up repeatedly until the seat is in the
n repeatedly until the seat is in the
at must not be adjusted while driving. Failure cident.
1
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 134 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Seats and storage compartments
Manual adjustment of the front seats
Seat adjuster controls
There are several seat adjustment functions for your conven-
ience
Some of the equipment listed is only fitted on certain models or is an optional
extra.
Control switches
Moving the seat backwards or forwards
Raising/lowering the seat
Adjusting the backrest angle
Adjusting the lumbar support
Moving the seats forwa
Lift the lever fig.
position.
Then release the lever
catch engages.
WARNING
The driver seat must only be vehicle is at a standstill. Fail
Adjusting the seat heig
Raising the seat
Pull the lever fig.
desired position.
Lowering the seat
Press the lever dow
desired position.
WARNING
The height of the driver se to do so could result in an ac
Fig. 106 Adjuster controls on driver seat
A1
A2
A3
A4
A1
A
A2
A2
Seats and storage compartments 135
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 135 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.
Adjusting the backrest angle
Lean forwards to take your weight off the backrest.
Turn the adjuster wheel page 134, fig. 106 to set the angle
of the backrest as required.
WARNING
The front backrests must not be reclined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and the airbag system might not protect as they should, with the subse- quent danger of injury.
Adjusting lumbar support*
Do not exert any pressure on the backrest and turn adjuster
wheel page 134, fig. 106 to adjust lumbar support.
As you make the adjustments, the curvature of the cushioned area of the
lumbar region becomes more or less acute. In this way, it adapts to the
natural curvature of the spine.
WARNING (continued)
A3
A4
Seats and storage compartments136
or the seat and backrest correspond with
ration of the seat. The seats can be
g the corresponding switch in the
/ backwards
07 forwards or backwards fig. 108
own .
part of the seat
up or down .
part of the seat
up or down .
Fig. 108 Front seat: Seat adjustment switches
A1
AA A2
AA A3
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 136 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Electric adjustment of front seats*
Adjusting the seat
The arrangement of the switches corresponds with the design
of the seats.
The adjustment switches f
the layout, design and ope
adjusted merely by pressin
required direction.
Moving the seat forwards
Press switch fig. 1
.
Raising/lowering the seat
Press switch up or d
Raising/lowering the front
Press the front of switch
Raising/lowering the rear
Press the rear of switch
Fig. 107 Front seat: Adjuster controls
AA
AA
Seats and storage compartments 137
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
appropriate direction of the arrow
e backrest .
t be reclined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts t not protect as they should, with the subse-
be adjusted to fit the natural curve of
Fig. 110 Front seat: Adjuster switch for lumbar support
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 137 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Control switches
Seat adjustment
Backrest adjustment
Lumbar support*
WARNING
The electrical seat adjustment also works when the ignition is off or when the key is not in the ignition. To avoid accidental injuries, never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
For safety reasons, the seat must only be adjusted when the vehicle is at a standstill. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.
Adjusting the backrest angle
Press the button in the
fig. 109 to adjust th
WARNING
The front backrests must no and the airbag system migh quent danger of injury.
Lumbar support*
The lumbar support can
the spine.
AA
AB
AC
Fig. 109 Front seat: Back- rest adjuster switch
Seats and storage compartments138
ry*
the driver door can be used to store
erent positions for the driver seat and
and 4 fig. 111, you can store and recall the
ons for up to four different drivers.
led if the button is in the up position
will light up next to the button (only
itched on).
ain in the memory. However, the seat and the
be adjusted using the conventional electrical
Fig. 111 Driver door: Memory system
STOP
STOP
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 138 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Adjusting the contour
Press the front part of the adjuster switch page 137, fig. 110
to increase the contour of the lumbar support.
Press the rear part of the adjuster switch to decrease the contour
of the lumbar support.
Adjusting the height
Press the top part of the adjuster switch to move the contour
upwards.
Press the bottom part of the adjuster switch to move the contour
down.
The lumbar support provides effective support for the natural curvature of the
spine to give a more relaxed seating position, especially on long journeys.
Driver seat memo
Description
The memory buttons in
and recall up to four diff
exterior mirrors.
Memory buttons
Using memory buttons 1, 2, 3
seat and exterior mirror positi
button
The seat memory will be disab
(press and release). The word
visible when the lights are sw
The stored settings will all rem
exterior mirrors can now only
STOP
Seats and storage compartments 139
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
e the settings stored in memory buttons 1 to 4.
d at any time.
recalled using either the memory
ontrol (remote control key).
s
en, press the desired memory button
sed, press and hold down the appropriate
e seat and exterior mirrors reach their
.
ng the remote control and open the driver
n minutes.
to be called up using the memory buttons if the
hin 10 minutes after unlocking the vehicle with
eat must only be adjusted when the vehicle is so could result in an accident.
mory function can be stopped at any time by by briefly pressing any of the memory
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 139 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
adjustment. Use of the button is recommended to disable the memory
system when the vehicle is being driven temporarily by a different driver
whose settings do not need to be stored in the memory.
Note You can also use the remote control to call up the stored settings
page 140.
Storing settings
The button must be in its down position (pressed in) before
you can store the desired settings.
Adjust the driver seat as required page 136.
Adjust both exterior mirrors page 132.
Press and hold the button. At the same time, press one of
the memory buttons for at least a second.
Release both buttons. The setting is now stored on the selected
memory button.
Any new setting selected automatically cancels the existing setting stored on
the memory button. It is best to begin with memory button No. 1 for the first
driver and then assign the other memory buttons to each subsequent driver.
The seat and mirror positions are stored when the vehicle is locked with the
remote control and are assigned to the remote control key. The exterior
mirrors adjust automatically to the previous position when you unlock the
vehicle; the driver seat adjusts automatically when you open the driver door.
However, this does not delet
These settings can be enable
Activating settings
Stored settings can be
buttons or the remote c
Using the memory button
If the driver door is op
briefly.
If the driver door is clo
memory button until th
programmed positions
Using the remote control
Unlock the vehicle usi
door within the next te
The seat adjustment will have
driver door is not opened wit
the remote control.
WARNING
For safety reasons, the s at a standstill. Failure to do
In an emergency, the me pressing the STOP button or buttons.
STOP
STOP
MEMO
Seats and storage compartments140
perly worn seat belts, the head
protection, provided they are prop-
height of the occupant.
f the head restraint with both hands.
nt.
t
wer the head restraint.
Fig. 112 Front seats: Head restraints
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 140 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Assigning remote control keys
The key must be assigned to a memory button so that the
positions stored in the memory can also be recalled using the
remote control key.
Assigning the remote control key to a memory button
Using the memory button, recall the settings that are to be
programmed onto the key.
Keeping the memory button pressed down, press the unlock
button on the remote control key within 10 seconds.
Wait for about 2 seconds before releasing the memory button.
Deleting assignment of the remote control key to the memory button
Press and hold the button and press the unlock button on
the remote control key within 10 seconds.
Wait for about 2 seconds before releasing the button.
The previous settings are automatically cancelled when the keys are re-
assigned to different memory buttons.
Head restraints
Front head restraints
In combination with pro
restraints offer effective
erly adjusted to suit the
Raising the head restraint
Take hold of the sides o
Pull up the head restrai
Lowering the head restrain
Press button and lo
MEMO
MEMO
AA
Seats and storage compartments 141
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
t
of the head restraint with both hands.
up as far as it will go.
int
. 113 and lower the head restraint.
int
up as far as it will go.
. 113 and pull out the head restraint.
nt in its guides until it clicks into place.
wer the head restraint.
ccupied, the head restraints should be moved
they do not obstruct the driver's field of
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 141 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Removing the head restraints
Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Press button and pull out the head restraint.
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place.
Press button and lower the head restraint.
The height of the head restraints is adjustable. They should be set to suit the
height of the occupant. In combination with the seat belts, the head
restraints offer effective protection, provided they are properly adjusted.
For best protection, the top of the head restraint should be at least at eye level
or higher.
Head restraints on the side rear seats
Raising the head restrain
Take hold of the sides
Pull the head restraint
Lowering the head restra
Press button fig
Removing the head restra
Pull the head restraint
Press button fig
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restrai
Press button and lo
When the rear seats are not o
to the lowest position so that
vision.
AA
AA
Fig. 113 Outer rear seats: Head restraints
AA
AA
AA
Seats and storage compartments142
cupied the head restraints should be moved to
y do not obstruct the driver's field of vision.
sted to several positions and incorpo-
ment.
f the armrest, fold the armrest all the way
dually until it engages in the desired
artment
fig. 115.
Fig. 115 Armrest between the driver seat and front passenger seat
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 142 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Rear seat central head restraint
Raising the head restraint
Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.
Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Lowering the head restraint
Press button fig. 114 and lower the head restraint.
Removing the head restraint
Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Press button fig. 114 and pull out the head restraint.
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place.
Press button and lower the head restraint.
When the rear seats are not oc
the lowest position so that the
Armrests
The armrest can be adju
rates a storage compart
Adjusting the armrest
To adjust the position o
down.
Then lift the armrest gra
position.
Opening the storage comp
Press the release lever
Fig. 114 Centre rear seat: Head restraints
AA
AA
AA
Seats and storage compartments 143
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
luggage net* or with non-elastic straps
g rings page 144.
luggage compartment can suddenly shift and ng of the vehicle.
n manoeuvre, loose objects in the passenger rward and might injure vehicle occupants.
in the luggage compartment and use appro- particularly in the case of heavy objects.
vy objects, always bear in mind that a change lso cause changes in vehicle handling.
on page 7.
s chafe against the wires of the heating element
ge them.
justed according to the load. If necessary,
l on the door pillar page 245.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 143 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Please note that the armrest can restrict the driver's movements when it is
lowered. The armrest should therefore be raised when driving in city traffic.
Luggage compartment
Loading the luggage compartment
Loads in the luggage compartment should be safely secured.
To maintain safe handling on the road, please observe the following
points:
Distribute the load evenly.
Position heavy items as far forward as possible fig. 116.
Secure the load with a
secured to the fastenin
WARNING
Unsecured objects in the cause changes in the handli
In an accident or a sudde compartment can be flung fo
Always keep all objects priate grips to secure them,
When you transport hea of the centre of gravity can a
Please refer to the notes
Caution Make sure that no hard object
in the rear window and dama
Note The tyre pressure must be ad
consult the tyre pressure labe
Fig. 116 Position heavy items as far forward as possible.
Seats and storage compartments144
used to secure and retain light items
ment.
to the four fastening rings -arrows-
ed to the fastening rings in the bottom of the
be used to hold objects weighing up to 5 kg. fely secured (risk of injury).
Fig. 118 Stretched luggage net
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 144 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Fastening rings
There are four fastening rings in the luggage compartment,
which can be used to secure loads.
Use the fastening rings to secure the load fig. 117 -arrows-.
Please refer to the safety notes page 17.
Luggage net*
The luggage net can be
in the luggage compart
Luggage net
Secure the luggage net
fig. 118.
The luggage net can be attach
luggage compartment panel.
WARNING
The luggage net should only Heavier objects cannot be sa
Fig. 117 Location of fastening rings in luggage compartment
Seats and storage compartments 145
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
cover*
w into the luggage compartment.
ompartment cover
. 120, pull the rolled-up cover evenly
vehicle.
ar into the grooves in the left and right-
20 -arrows-.
mpartment cover
rooves in the side trim.
wly.
luggage compartment cover page 147
Fig. 120 Tailgate open with luggage compart- ment cover closed
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 145 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Retaining strap*
The retaining strap can be used to secure items of luggage to
the right-hand side lining in the luggage compartment.
Hook the retaining strap into housing or fig. 119.
You can attach the strap to the top or bottom housing, depending on the size
of the object you wish to secure.
To secure shorter objects, the retaining strap can also be attached to the
centre. However, this is only possible if the strap is attached to housing .
WARNING
The retaining strap should only be used to hold objects weighing up to 5 kg. Heavier objects cannot be safely secured (risk of injury).
Luggage compartment
The cover blocks the vie
Pulling out the luggage c
Using handle fig
towards the rear of the
Insert the ends of the b
hand side trim fig. 1
Retracting the luggage co
Lift the bar out of the g
Let the cover roll up slo
Removing and installing the
Fig. 119 Retaining strap attached to right-hand side lining
AA AB
AB
AA
Seats and storage compartments146
h the rear backrest folded down
rests page 149.
bar in the retainers fig. 121.
n
e retainers.
ly.
et partition page 147.
AA
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 146 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
WARNING
The luggage compartment cover should not be used as a storage shelf. Articles placed on this cover could cause injury to vehicle occupants in an accident or if the brakes are applied suddenly.
Net partition*
The net partition prevents loose objects in the luggage
compartment from being thrown forward into the passenger
compartment (e.g. under sudden braking).
Pulling out and securing the net partition
Pull the net up as far as it will go.
Engage the ends of the bar in the retainers fig. 121.
Using the net partition wit
Fold down the rear back
Pull the net upwards.
Engage the ends of the
Retracting the net partitio
Unhook the bar from th
Let the net retract slow
Removing and installing the n
Fig. 121 Retainers for the net partition
AB
Seats and storage compartments 147
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
rtment cover / net partition
ar door.
ts page 149.
the direction indicated fig. 122 and lift
ails.
rtment cover / net partition
ar door.
ts page 149.
on the backrest so that the retainers
retaining rails fig. 123.
partment cover / net partition towards the
hicle as far as it will go.
AB
AC
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 147 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Removing and installing luggage compartment cover / net partition
The luggage compartment cover / net partition can only be
removed when the rear backrests are folded forwards.
Removing luggage compa
Open the right-hand re
Fold down the backres
Pull the net partition in
it out of the retaining r
Installing luggage compa
Open the right-hand re
Fold down the backres
Fit the net partition
are located next to the
Push the luggage com
left-hand side of the veFig. 122 Removing luggage compartment cover / net partition
Fig. 123 Installing luggage compartment cover / net partition
AA
Seats and storage compartments148
fig. 124, lift the floor panel and line
of the floor panel with the recesses .
ansporting onto the luggage compart-
fig. 124 and fold out the floor
backrest.
fig. 124 and fold out the floor
backrest.
panel towards the rear of the vehicle so it
ers fig. 125.
d under floor panel fig. 124.
g items in the luggage compartment liner can
e floor panel or removing it completely.
out to the upright position you should not
than 7.5 kg, or items which exceed 2/3 of the
el.
AB
AC
AA
AA
AD
AB
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 148 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Luggage compartment liner*
You can use the liner to protect the inside of the luggage
compartment when carrying wet or dirty items.
Lifting the floor panel
Open the tailgate.
Take hold of handle
up the bottom corners
Put the items you are tr
ment liner
Folding the floor panel
Open the tailgate.
Take hold of the handle
panel as far as the rear
Removing the floor panel
Open the tailgate.
Take hold of the handle
panel as far as the rear
Pull the complete floor
comes out of the retain
Small items can also be store
The space available for carryin
be increased by folding out th
Caution When the floor panel is folded
transport items weighing more
height of the upright floor pan
Fig. 124 Floor panel raised
Fig. 125 Floor panel removed for increased luggage space
AA
Seats and storage compartments 149
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
compartment
backrest can be folded forwards either
o increase the capacity of the luggage
ards
fig. 127 in the direction indicated
t.
its upright position
ntil it engages securely . The red
should no longer be visible when the
cured.
Fig. 127 Backrest release lever
AA
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 149 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note It is advisable to secure the items by means of a strap secured to the
fastening rings on the left and the right hand side.
Side storage compartment
The CD-ROM player for the navigation system* is located in
the left side compartment of the luggage compartment.
To open the storage compartment, pull the handle
forwards fig. 126.
CD-ROM player for navigation system*
The CD-ROM player for the navigation system is located in this storage
compartment in the luggage compartment. Separate operating instructions
are enclosed for this system.
Extending the luggage
The two sections of the
together or separately t
compartment.
Folding the backrest forw
Press the release lever
by the arrow.
Fold down the backres
Returning the backrest to
Push the backrest up u
marking on the tab
backrest is properly se
Fig. 126 Luggage compartment: Side trim with closed storage compartment
AB
Seats and storage compartments150
to transport skis or other extra-long
vehicle without soiling or damaging
Fig. 128 Detailed view of the rear of the rear back- rest: Ski bag cover
Fig. 129 Fastening the ski bag in the seatbelt buckle
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 150 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
WARNING
Make sure that the rear backrest is securely locked in position so that the seat belt can provide proper protection on the centre rear seat.
The rear backrest must always be securely latched so that objects stored in the luggage compartment will not fly forward during sudden braking.
Caution When returning the backrest to an upright position, make sure that the seat
belts for the outer rear seats are in their guides, so that they cannot be caught
up and damaged in the catches for the backrest.
Ski bag*
You can use the ski bag
objects safely inside the
the upholstery.
Seats and storage compartments 151
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
in place with the fastening belt after it has
after use if it is still damp.
ils*
be carried on the roof rack.
ou intend to carry loads on the roof:
cross bars from the of SEAT Genuine Accesso-
basic elements of a complete roof rack system.
the corresponding additional fastenings must
ycles, surfboards, skis and boats. All the
re available from Authorised Service Centres.
used by the use of other types of roof rack or
be covered by the factory warranty. The roof rack
talled exactly according to the instructions
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 151 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Loading
Open the tailgate.
Press the release catch for the ski bag cover page 150,
fig. 128 -arrow- and swivel the cover downwards.
Pull down the centre rear armrest.
From the passenger compartment, press down the release catch
for the ski bag cover and pull out the cover.
Pull out and unfold the ski bag.
The long items can now be loaded through the luggage compart-
ment into the ski bag .
Securing
Insert the fastening belt page 150, fig. 129 of the ski bag
into the centre seat belt buckle .
Pull the free end of belt to tighten.
Storing
Close the cover of the load-through hatch in the luggage
compartment.
Carefully fold away the ski bag.
Close the inside cover of the load-through hatch from the
passenger compartment.
WARNING
The ski bag must be secured been loaded.
Note Do not fold away the ski bag
Roof rack / roof ra
Description
Additional luggage can
Note the following points if y
We recommend using the
ries range.
These cross bars form the
For safety reasons, however,
be fitted to carry luggage, bic
components of this system a
Caution Any damage to the vehicle ca
incorrect installation will not
system must therefore be ins
provided.
AA
AB
AC
Seats and storage compartments152
f must be securely attached. The
ected whenever you carry loads on
f of your vehicle is 75 kg. Use the weight of the
e load as a basis to calculate the roof load.
sed, the roof rack must not be loaded to the
f less resistant systems are used, these must
m weight permitted indicated in the assembly
must be securely attached. Failure to do so
um roof load for the vehicle, the maximum ross vehicle weight. Failure to do so could
or bulky loads on the roof, bear in mind that cted by the extra weight on the roof and a ss winds. Adjust your speed and driving style ts.
t the tailgate strike the roof load when open.
vironment ed for convenience, even when they are not
eased air resistance means that the vehicle
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 152 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Attachment points
The roof rack must be attached at the marked points only.
The cross-bars must be fitted exactly between the points marked on the roof
railings fig. 130. The markings are visible on the inside of the railings.
Caution A roof rack unit must not be used if the vehicle is not equipped with roof rails
(basic support).
Roof load
Loads carried on the roo
vehicle's handling is aff
the vehicle.
The authorised load on the roo
roof rack system and that of th
If less resistant systems are u
maximum weight permitted. I
only be loaded to the maximu
instructions.
WARNING
Loads carried on the roof could result in an accident.
Do not exceed the maxim axle loads or the maximum g result in an accident.
When transporting heavy the vehicle's handling is affe possible susceptibility to cro accordingly to avoid acciden
Caution Please take extra care not to le
For the sake of the en Roof racks are often left attach
being used. However, the incr
Fig. 130 Attachment points for cross bars
Seats and storage compartments 153
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ps or glasses. These could cause injury in the
r armrest*
fig. 132.
tainer arms , release it by pressing in
(arrow) and move it as required.
ositioned against the drink holder so that it is
Fig. 132 Drink holder in the rear armrest
AB
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 153 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
uses more fuel. For this reason you should always take off the roof rack when
it is not in use.
Drink holder
Front drink holder
To open the drink holder, press the symbol on the drink holder
lid fig. 131
To close the drink holder, press it in until it engages.
WARNING
Do not put any hot drinks in the drink holder while the vehicle is moving. You can be scalded if the hot liquid is spilt.
Do not use hard china cu event of an accident.
Drink holder in the rea
Opening the drink holder
Press the symbol
Adjusting the retainer arm
To adjust one of the re
the direction indicated
The retainer arm should be p
held securely.
Fig. 131 Detailed view of the dash panel: Drink holder
WARNING (continued)
AA
Seats and storage compartments154
art of the ashtray fig. 133.
f the ashtray fig. 133 and lift it out.
ress it into its mountings.
ashtray, as this could cause a fire.
AA
AB
Fig. 134 Rear ashtray
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 154 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
One or two drink holders can be held in the centre console.
WARNING
Do not put any hot drinks in the drink holder while the vehicle is moving. You can be scalded if the hot liquid is spilt.
Do not use hard china cups or glasses. These could cause injury in the event of an accident.
Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and electric sockets*
Front ashtray*
Opening the ashtray
Lightly press the front p
Removing the ashtray
Take hold of the sides o
Fitting the ashtray casing
Insert the casing and p
WARNING
Never put waste paper in the
Rear ashtray
Fig. 133 Centre console: Open ashtray
Seats and storage compartments 155
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
e cigarette lighter can also be used as
r electrical appliances.
r
ighter button.
op out slightly.
ighter immediately.
r element of the cigarette lighter to light
r back in its socket.
lighter.
Fig. 135 Cigarette lighter in the centre console
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 155 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Opening the ashtray
Lift the lid.
Removing the ashtray
Take hold of the lid page 154, fig. 134 and lift out the ashtray.
Fitting the ashtray casing
Open the lid on the ashtray and press the casing into the
mounting as far as it will go.
WARNING
Never put waste paper in the ashtray, as this could cause a fire.
Cigarette lighter*
The 12 volt socket for th
a power source for othe
Using the cigarette lighte
Press in the cigarette l
Wait for the lighter to p
Pull out the cigarette l
Use the glowing heate
your cigarette.
Put the cigarette lighte
Operating the socket
Take out the cigarette
Seats and storage compartments156
ggage compartment*
be connected to the 12 volt socket.
t cover fig. 136.
ectrical appliance into the socket.
nnected to the 12 volt socket. The appliances
not exceed a power rating of 100 W.
cessories connected to them are also func- hed off or the key removed. To avoid the risk unsupervised in the vehicle.
plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.
Fig. 136 Detailed view of the side trim in the luggage compartment: 12 volt socket
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 156 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the cigarette
lighter socket.
The cigarette lighter fig. 135 employs a standard 12 volt socket, which can
also be used as a power source for electrical appliances. The appliances
connected to the socket must not exceed a power rating of 100 W.
WARNING
Be careful when using the electric cigarette lighter. Carelessness or negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
The lighter will only work when the ignition is switched on.
The electrical sockets and, therefore, any appliances connected to them will only work when the ignition is switched on.
Caution Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.
Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a
battery discharge.
Electric socket in the lu
Electrical equipment can
Lift the electrical socke
Insert the plug of the el
Electrical equipment can be co
connected to the socket must
WARNING
The power points, and any ac tional with the ignition switc of injury, never leave children
Caution Always use the correct type of
Seats and storage compartments 157
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
he socket. The childproof safety device on
ed.
Europlug as far as possible into the socket
inserted and will not jump out of place
mp or similar.
ket
nected
ed to connect electrical equipment with a Euro-
er consumption in this socket must not exceed
s).
pliance is connected, the total consumption of
ceed 150 watts. If necessary, please refer to the
rm the power consumption of the connected
uld be in perfect working order without any
nectors (for example, adapters) which hang plug socket may damage the socket with the
roof safety device is disconnected. The socket
r use
fault, for example, disconnection due to
rrent or temperature
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 157 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a
battery discharge.
230 volt socket for Europlug*
Electrical equipment can also be connected to the 230 volt
socket in the centre console.
The 230 Volt socket can only be used when the engine is running
.
In vehicles with folding cover:
Hold the cover of the socket at the lower recess.
Lift the cover to open fig. 137.
Inserting the Europlug
Insert the Europlug in t
the socket is deactivat
If necessary, press the
to ensure it is correctly
while driving over a bu
LED warning lamp above soc
Equipment which may be con
The 230 volt socket can be us
plug. Please note that the pow
150 watts (peaks of 300 watt
Even when more than one ap
all the appliances must not ex
manufacturer's label to confi
equipment.
All connected appliances sho
faults.
WARNING
Heavy appliances or con down directly from the Euro resultant risk of injury.
Fig. 137 Centre console: 230 volt socket
Steady green
light:
The childp
is ready fo
Flashing red
light:
There is a
excess cu
Seats and storage compartments158
hich have been left switched on, will automat-
s to the socket. For technical reasons, these
pliances to the 230 volt power socket, as they
any queries, please check the manufacturer's
upply accepted by the appliance.
ample for laptops, their built-in overload
s the equipment from switching on in the event
t. In this case, disconnect the adapter from the
nect after ten seconds.
may cause interference to the radio or vehicle
built-in childproof device and only carries live
orrectly plugged in.
operate correctly in the absence of adequate
ket is 115 volts. Therefore the socket should
led at the factory. You can obtain retrofit kits
l Service. Do not connect 115 Volt appliances
ment in the vicinity of the aerial in the rear
e to the reception of stations broadcasting in
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 158 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Ensure that appliances connected to the socket are secure to prevent them from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking or an accident. This could result in severe injury or loss of life page 16, Storing objects.
Never spill liquid over the socket there is a risk of death. If any mois- ture enters the socket, ensure that it is thoroughly dry before using.
Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire, with the resultant risk of injury.
Children must never be left alone in the vehicle with the engine running. They could cause an accident.
Appliances connected to the socket do not behave in the same way as when they are connected to the mains power supply. They may overheat during use and cause injury.
When using adapters and extension leads, the childproof safety device on the 230 volt socket is disconnected and the socket is live. Risk of injury!.
Never insert objects which conduct electricity, such as a needle, in the pins of the 230 volt socket. There is a risk of death.
Always switch off electrical appliances connected to the socket if the inverter goes off as a result of overheating. Failure to comply could result in injuries.
Caution The instructions for handling appliances connected to the socket must be
observed.
If the power consumption of the appliances connected exceeds 150
watts, the socket inverter will overheat. If the temperature exceeds a certain
value, the inverter will switch off. It may also switch off if the outside temper-
ature is very high, even if the power consumption is normal. The inverter will
switch on again automatically after it has cooled down. Appliances
connected to the socket, and w
ically come back on .
Do not connect neon lamp
could break down.
Do not connect 115 volt ap
could be damaged. If you have
label for details of the power s
With some adapters, for ex
disconnection system prevent
of an excessive start-up curren
power supply and try to recon
Note Non-insulated equipment
electronics.
The Europlug socket has a
current when the Europlug is c
Some appliances may not
power (watts).
In some countries this soc
have a different inverter instal
from your Authorised Technica
to the 230 Volt socket.
The use of electrical equip
window may cause interferenc
AM.
WARNING (continued)
Seats and storage compartments 159
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
partment is equipped with a light.
rtment
lid in the direction indicated (arrow)
he lid.
tment
it in until it engages.
are switched on, the light in the glove compart-
ened.
for a pen and a note pad.
Fig. 138 Glove compart- ment
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 159 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Compartments
Overview
There are several storage compartments at various points in
the vehicle.
Your vehicle has the following storage compartments:
Some of the compartments listed are only provided in certain models or are
optional extras.
Glove compartment
The lockable glove com
Opening the glove compa
Pull the handle on the
fig. 138 and open t
Closing the glove compar
Close the lid and push
If the side lights or headlights
ment comes on when it is op
The lid has separate holders
First-aid kit*
Emergency triangle*
Glove compartment page 159
Storage compartment in the centre console
On-board documentation compartment*
Compartments in the door trims page 160
Coat hooks page 160
Side storage compartment in luggage com-
partment
Seats and storage compartments160
ve each of the rear doors.
y items of clothing hanging from the coat iew to the rear.
ly be used for lightweight clothing. Do not ects in the pockets.
rs to hang up the clothing, as this could inter- ead-protection airbags*.
Fig. 140 Area above the rear doors: Coat hooks
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 160 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
WARNING
For safety reasons, the glove compartment must always be closed when the vehicle is moving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Compartments in the door trim
Storage compartments are provided in the door trims.
WARNING
The storage compartments in the door trims should only be used to store small objects. Make sure that they are stored safely inside the compart- ment, as they might otherwise impair the protection offered by the side airbags.
Coat hooks
There is a coat hook abo
WARNING
Please make sure that an hooks do not obstruct your v
The coat hooks should on leave any heavy or sharp obj
Do not use clothes hange fere with the function of the h
Fig. 139 Door trim with storage compartment
Seats and storage compartments 161
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 161 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Compartments in the front seats
There is a storage compartment with a lid at the front of each
front seat.
Opening
Pull the handle to open the compartment.
Closing
Close the lid and push it in until it engages.
Note The compartments will hold a maximum weight of 1 kg.
Air conditioning162
re outside the vehicle are high, condensation
the air cooling system and form a pool under-
al and does not indicate a leak.
ow, the blower normally only switches to a
t has warmed up sufficiently (this does not
ngine power, the air conditioner compressor is
pulling away from standstill with full throttle.
off if the coolant temperature is excessively
ne cooling under extreme loads.
d particulate filter and activated charcoal filter)
purities in the outside air, including dust and
with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter
he intervals specified in the Service Plan.
with a high level of air pollution and the filter
ay be necessary to change the filter element
conditioner system is damaged, switch over to
damage and have the system checked by a
er require specialist knowledge and special
ontact a qualified workshop if the system is not
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 162 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Air conditioning
2C-Climatronic
Description
The air conditioner is designed to automatically keep the
passenger compartment at the temperature you find most
comfortable at all times of the year.
Recommended settings:
Set the temperature to 22 C (71 F).
Press the button page 164, fig. 141.
The following setting quickly provides a comfortable temperature inside the
vehicle. We therefore recommend you do not modify the setting unless you
find this temperature uncomfortable or where circumstances require as such.
The air conditioner provides heating and ventilation and also cools and dehu-
midifies the air inside the vehicle.
The air conditioner is fully automatic and will constantly maintain the temper-
ature which has been set. To achieve this, the temperature of the air supplied
to the interior, the blower speed (volume of air delivery) and the air distribu-
tion are regulated automatically. The system also takes solar radiation into
account and, therefore, no subsequent manual readjustments are required.
Therefore, automatic mode page 165 should be used for the comfort of all
the passengers in virtually all conditions throughout the year.
Please note the following points:
The humidity of the air is automatically reduced when the system cools the
interior of the vehicle. This helps to prevent condensation on the windows.
If the humidity and temperatu
can drip off the evaporator in
neath the vehicle. This is norm
If the outside temperature is l
higher speed once the coolan
apply to the defrost setting).
In order to achieve maximum e
temporarily switched off when
The compressor also switches
high to ensure adequate engi
Pollution filter
The pollution filter (a combine
serves as a barrier against im
pollen.
For the air conditioner to work
element must be replaced at t
If the vehicle is driven in areas
is no longer fully effective, it m
more frequently.
Caution If you suspect that the air
ECON mode to prevent further
qualified workshop.
Repairs to the air condition
tools. For this reason, please c
working properly.
AUTO
Air conditioning 163
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 163 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen clear of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure unimpaired heating and cooling and to prevent the windows
misting over.
The air from the outlets flows through the passenger compartment and
out through the slots below the rear window. Therefore, do not cover these
slots with items of clothing or other objects.
The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the
sliding/tilting sunroof* closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up after
standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quickly
by opening the windows briefly.
Air conditioning164
r.
. 141 Air conditioner controls
tic mode
ture selection for the driver
t passenger sides
air recirculation mode
s off air cooling
s off air conditioner (instead of )
tic air recirculation mode (instead of )
OFF
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 164 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Controls
This overview will help you become quickly familiar with the controls for the air conditione
The left-hand display shows the temperature selected for the left-hand side
and the right-hand display the temperature for the right-hand side.
The functions can be switched on or off by briefly pressing the buttons. The
diode on the buttons lights up when the function is enabled.
The grille between buttons and must be kept clear, as the tempera-
ture sensors are located behind the grille.
Do not cover the grille.
Do not clean the grille with a vacuum cleaner, as this could damage the
temperature sensors located behind the grille.
Fig
Button(s) Meaning
Automa
(left and right
sides)
Tempera
and fron
Defrost
Manual
Switche
Switche
Automa
AUTO
- +
ECON
OFF
Air conditioning 165
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
s not regulated automatically. The temperature
on the driver side pressed for several seconds,
nger side can be set to the temperature of the
display indicates the new temperature value.
ure
can be selected for the driver and
ns below the displays page 164,
ed temperature is selected for the driver
r side.
rature setting is shown in the display above the
on the driver side pressed for several seconds,
nger side can be set to the temperature of the
isplay indicates the new temperature value. The
can be restored by resetting the display on the
quired.
- +
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 165 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The , and buttons (which regulate air distribution) can either be
selected individually or in combination.
Automatic mode
Standard setting for all seasons.
Switching on automatic mode
Select a temperature between +18 C (64 F) and +29 C (86 F).
Press the button page 164, fig. 141.
The automatic mode maintains a constant temperature inside the vehicle and
dehumidifies the air. Air temperature, air delivery and air distribution are
regulated automatically to reach the desired interior temperature as quickly
as possible, and then to maintain this temperature. The system automatically
compensates for any variations in the outside temperature and for the effect
of direct sunlight.
The automatic temperature regulation only operates at temperature settings
between +18 C and +29 C. If a temperature below +18 C is selected, LO
appears on the display. If a temperature is selected which is higher than
+29 C, the display will show HI. In the maximum and minimum settings, the
climate control operates continuously with maximum cooling or heating
output and the temperature i
is not regulated.
Note By keeping the button
the temperature of the passe
driver side or vice versa. The
Selecting the temperat
Separate temperatures
front passenger sides.
Press the or butto
fig. 141 until the desir
side or front passenge
The currently selected tempe
buttons.
By keeping the button
the temperature of the passe
driver side or vice versa. The d
previous temperature setting
driver or passenger side as re
(centre buttons)
Adjusts blower speed
Air to the windows
Air from the dashboard outlets
Air to the footwells
Button(s) Meaning
- +
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
- +
AUTO
Air conditioning166
nnel or in traffic congestions, to prevent
ior of the vehicle.
the air recirculation mode enabled because, cted, the windscreen may mist up because no ior of the vehicle, with the subsequent risk of
fuel.
button page 164, fig. 141.
button again or select the
ECON mode. The heating and the blower are
stands for Economy. Disconnecting air
fuel consumption.
mperature must not be lower than the outside
e blower does not cool or dehumidify the air in
d therefore mist up.
y heater is switched off in ECON mode to save
n continues to light up when the ECON mode
air conditioner has been switched on) this is
ECON
CON
ECON AUTO
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 166 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Defrosting
The windscreen and side windows are defrosted or demisted
as quickly as possible.
To enable this mode, press the page 164, fig. 141 button.
To disable, press the button again or select the button.
The temperature is regulated automatically. The air output is increased to
maximum and most of the air comes out of outlets 1 and 2 page 169.
The air recirculation and ECON modes are switched off when the button is
pressed.
Air recirculation: manual activation
The air recirculation setting prevents fumes etc. from entering
the interior.
Activating air recirculation mode
Press button page 164, fig. 141 .
Deactivating air recirculation mode
Press the button again or
Press the button or
Press button .
In this setting, the air in the vehicle is constantly recirculated. We recommend
using the air recirculation mode in the following circumstances:
When driving through a tu
exhaust gas entering the inter
WARNING
Do not drive for too long with if the compressor is disconne fresh air is entering the inter accidents.
ECON Mode (economy)
ECON mode helps save
To activate, press the
To deactivate, press the
button.
Air cooling is disconnected in
adjusted automatically. ECON
cooling (compressor) reduces
Please note that the interior te
temperature in ECON mode. Th
the interior. The windows coul
In diesel vehicles, the auxiliar
fuel.
Note If the diode on the ECON butto
has been switched off (i.e. the
AUTO
AUTO
E
Air conditioning 167
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
n mode should normally be left switched on at
te approx. 30 seconds after the engine ignition
his initial period, fresh air is fed into the vehicle.
air conditioner detects a certain concentration
e control unit will either pass the incoming air
automatically switch on the air recirculation. If
of pollution in the outside air, the air conditioner
recirculation and the supply of air from the
the level of pollution decreases, air is fed into
again.
n operates for a maximum period of 12 minutes.
the automatic air recirculation is on, press the
n switches itself off under certain circumstances
elected). In ECON and at temperatures lower
, the automatic air recirculation mode is limited
ture display from C to F and vice
y can be switched from C (degrees
Fahrenheit) and vice versa.
button for air recirculation mode and
utton of the left-hand temperature
fig. 141.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 167 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
due to a defect in one of the air conditioner components. If a malfunction
should occur, please contact a specialised workshop.
Air recirculation: automatic activation*
If the outside air is polluted by diesel and petrol emissions,
an air quality sensor in the vehicle will automatically switch
on the air recirculation.
Activating air recirculation mode
Press the button fig. 142.
Deactivating air recirculation mode
Press the button again or
Press the button or
Press button .
The automatic air recirculatio
all times.
The system is ready to opera
key has been turned. During t
If the air purity sensor in the
of fumes in the outside air, th
through the pollution filter or
there is a high concentration
automatically switches to air
outside is cut off. As soon as
the vehicle from the outside
The automatic air recirculatio
If the windows mist up when
button immediately.
The automatic air recirculatio
(for instance if or is s
than approx. 8 C below zero
to 12 seconds.
Switching the tempera versa
The temperature displa
Celsius) to F (degrees
Press and hold the
briefly press the plus b
selector page 164,
Fig. 142 Button for auto- matic air recirculation
AUTO
Air conditioning168
ed blower speed can be reduced or
tons in the centre of the control panel
set the blower to the desired speed (and
air delivery).
tomatically regulates the blower speed
erature. However, you can also adjust the air
blower setting is illustrated by a bar in the
tons).
ssenger temperature
e passenger temperature like the driver
button on the driver side for 2 seconds approx-
lly set the driver temperature like the
the button on the passenger side for 2 AUTO
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 168 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Switching the air conditioner on/off
Switching the air conditioner off: models with an button
Press the button. The air conditioner is switched off and the
supply of air from outside the vehicle is cut off.
Switching the air conditioner off: models with a button
Keep pressing the button for the blower until the display
segment is empty. The air conditioner is switched off and the
supply of air from outside the vehicle is cut off.
Switching the air conditioner on: models with an button
Press the button again, or
Press the button or
Press one of the air distribution buttons , or .
Switching the air conditioner on: models with a button
Press the button for the blower, or
Press the button or
Press one of the air distribution buttons , or .
The air conditioner also starts to operate if one of the blower or temperature
selector buttons is pressed.
Blower speed
The automatically select
increased manually.
Press the and but
page 164, fig. 141 to
regulate the volume of
The air conditioner system au
according to the interior temp
delivery manually. The current
middle display (above the but
Automatic change of pa
In order to automatically set th
temperature, press the
imately. In order to automatica
passenger temperature, press
seconds approximately.
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
AUTO
+
AUTO
- +
- +
AUTO
Air conditioning 169
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ir conditioner is mainly issued from outlets
cooling, outlets and should therefore
rammed air distribution can be
can be operated either separately or in combi-
cally controlled air distribution, switch off the
or press the button
g. 143 Dash panel: Location of air outlets
A3
A3 A4
AUTO
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 169 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Air outlets
The air outlets fig. 143 and can be operated as follows:
Outlets and
The outlets can be opened and closed by turning the left thum-
bwheels.
The direction of air delivery from the outlets can be varied as
required using the adjuster in the centre of each outlet grille. The
direction of air flow can be adjusted horizontally and vertically as
desired.
The flow of air from the outlets is controlled either automatically or manually,
depending on the operating mode selected. All the outlets can provide air
that is either heated, unheated or cooled.
The heater outlets for the rear footwells are located under the front seats.
They are controlled together with outlets .
Note The cool air provided by the a
and . To ensure adequate
never be closed completely.
Air distribution
The automatically-prog
altered manually.
The buttons , and
nation. To return to automati
selected functions separately
Fi
A3 A4
A3 A4
A5
A4
Air conditioning170
d up after standing in the sun, open the
a short time to cool the vehicle.
vironment the amount of pollutants emitted from your
tched on, the air conditioner settings
selected automatically.
lected are automatically stored and assigned
hicle is started, the air conditioner automati-
ned to the key. Hence, every driver automati-
settings without having to select them manu-
key and enter other settings, the previous
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 170 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Each of the three buttons has a specific function. The numbers relate to the
air outlets page 169, fig. 143.
Air directed to windows
This setting directs all the air to outlets 1 and 2. Unlike in setting , the
volume of air delivery remains the same.
Air to the driver/front passenger
All the air comes from outlets 3 and 4 in the dash panel and from the rear of
the centre console.
Air to the footwells
Most of the air emerges from outlets 5 and the outlets under the front seats.
Some of the air will also be issued from outlets 3 and 4.
Note In all of the above air distribution settings, a small amount of air will still
come from the other outlets.
Economical use of the air conditioner
Economical use of the air conditioner will help save fuel.
Engine power is reduced and fuel consumption increases when the
air conditioner is in cooling mode. To ensure that the system is only
switched on when it is really necessary, please note the following
points:
Select ECON mode if you wish to save fuel.
Select ECON mode if you decide to open the windows or sunroof*
while driving.
If the vehicle has heate
windows and doors for
For the sake of the en By saving fuel you also reduce
vehicle.
Key settings
When the ignition is swi
assigned to the key are
The air conditioner settings se
to the key in use. When the ve
cally selects the settings assig
cally obtains his/her preferred
ally.
Note Should another driver use the
settings will be deleted.
Air conditioning 171
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
st of the front seats can be electrically
fig. 144 to switch on and adjust the
t front seats.
en the thumbwheel is set to 0. The temperature
g elements of the seat heating, please do not
arp pressure to a single point.
Fig. 144 Detailed view of the dash panel: Thum- bwheel controls for seat heating
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 171 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Solar-powered blower/sunroof*
If the vehicle is parked in sufficiently strong sunlight, the
blower will operate in solar-powered mode when the ignition
is switched off.
After the ignition is switched off, the blower is supplied with electrical power
from the sunroof. Please ensure that outlets 3 and 4 are open page 169,
fig. 143 to ensure the best possible ventilation.
The blower only works when the sunroof is closed or tilted open at the rear.
If the air recirculation mode is on when you switch off the engine, the air
conditioner will automatically switch to fresh air ventilation.
Auxiliary heater*
Diesel vehicles are fitted with an auxiliary heater2) to raise the temperature of
the interior as quickly as possible. At outdoor temperatures below +5 C and
with the engine running, the auxiliary heater will switch on and off automati-
cally depending on the temperature of the coolant.
In order to save fuel, the auxiliary heater can be can be switched off by briefly
pressing the button on the air conditioner.
Seat heating*
The surface and backre
heated.
Turn thumbwheel or
heating on the left or righ
The heating is switched off wh
settings range from 1 to 6.
Caution To avoid damaging the heatin
kneel on the seat or apply sh
2) For Nordic countries only.
A1 A2
Driving172
of the steering wheel when the vehicle is n accident.
ver must always be securely engaged when t the position of the steering wheel cannot e this could cause an accident.
ramme (ESP)
safer in certain situations.
Fig. 146 Detailed view of the centre console: ESP button
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 172 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver
Push the lever fig. 145 down .
Move the steering wheel to the desired position.
Then push the lever back up against the steering column until it
engages in position.
WARNING
Never adjust the position moving, as this could cause a
For safety reasons, the le the vehicle is moving, so tha shift unexpectedly. Otherwis
Safety
Electronic Stability Prog
ESP helps make driving
Fig. 145 Lever beneath steering column
Driving 173
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ponding warning notes on ESP in page 191,
to start and stop the engine.
this position. To engage the steering wheel n the wheel until you hear the pin engage. You
ering lock when you leave the vehicle. This will
Fig. 147 Ignition key positions
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 173 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) contains the electronic differential
lock (EDL) and the traction control system (TCS). The ESP function works
together with the ABS. If a fault in the ABS occurs, both warning lamps light
up, but if the ESP fails, only the ESP warning lamp lights up.
The ESP is started automatically when the engine is started.
The ESP switch deactivates both TCS and ESP functions. The ESP, in spite of
being deactivated, will always self-connect when necessary if brakes are
being used.
The TCS can be deactivated when in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.
For example:
When driving with snow chains,
when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for
example.
Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.
When does the warning lamp switch on or flash?
On switching the ignition on, it lights up for about two seconds to carry
out a function control.
The warning lamp will start flashing when the vehicle is moving if the ESP
or the TCS is activated.
It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, as this can cause accidents.
Please refer to the corres Intelligent technology.
Ignition lock
Ignition key positions
The ignition key is used
Position
The ignition key is inserted in
lock, take out the key and tur
should always engage the ste
help to deter thefts .
WARNING (continued)
A1
Driving174
arbox: After switching off the ignition, you can
f the selector lever is in position P (parking
ed after the ignition key has been removed.
ping the engine
started with an original SEAT key.
ine:
the clutch pedal all the way down.
o neutral (automatic gearbox: selector
Fig. 148 Ignition key positions
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 174 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Switching on the ignition/pre-heating glow plugs
If the key is difficult to turn in the lock, move the steering wheel (to take the
load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key turns freely. In the case of
vehicles with a diesel engine, the key is turned to this position to preheat the
glow plugs.
Starting the engine
The engine is started in this position. Electrical components with a high
power consumption are switched off temporarily.
After the engine has started, the ignition key returns to position by itself.
The ignition key has to be turned back to position before re-starting the
engine. The starter inhibitor in the ignition lock prevents the starter motor
from engaging when the engine is running, as this could cause damage.
Switching off the ignition
Turn the ignition key to this position.
WARNING
Never remove the ignition key until the vehicle is stationary! Otherwise the steering lock could engage suddenly, which could cause an accident.
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause injuries.
Note If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, it will be
necessary to leave the key in position for about 5 seconds before starting
the engine.
Vehicles with automatic ge
only remove the ignition key i
lock). The selector lever is lock
Starting and stop
Starting the engine
The engine can only be
Vehicles with a petrol eng
Use the foot brake.
Manual gearbox: Push
Move the gear lever int
lever to P or N) .
A2
A3
A2
A1
A1
A2
Driving 175
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
t outside temperatures above +8 C, the glow
ome on for about one second. This means that
mediately.
ined spaces, as the exhaust gases are
ll throttle and extreme load conditions until the
l operating temperature, otherwise this can
nvironment running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
elp avoid unnecessary exhaust emissions.
position page 174, fig. 148.
off until the vehicle is stationary.
A1
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 175 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Turn the ignition key to position without pressing the acceler-
ator.
Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts (the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine).
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Use the foot brake.
Manual gearbox: Push the clutch pedal all the way down.
Move the gear lever into neutral (automatic gearbox: selector
lever to P or N) .
Turn the ignition key to position . The pre-heating indicator
light comes on while the glow plugs are preheating.
When the indicator light goes out, turn the ignition key to
position . Do not press the accelerator.
Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts (the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine).
When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If the engine fails to start straight away, stop after 10 seconds and try again
after about half a minute.
Glow plug system*
To assist starting at low temperatures, diesel engines are equipped with a
glow plug preheating system. The preheating time depends on the coolant
temperature and the outside temperature. Start the engine as soon as the
glow plug indicator light goes out.
When the engine is warm or a
plug indicator light will only c
the engine can be started im
If the engine will not start...
page 291
page 294
page 225, Refuelling
WARNING
Never run the engine in conf poisonous.
Caution Avoid high engine speeds, fu
engine has reached its norma
damage the engine.
For the sake of the e Do not warm up the engine by
Start immediately. This will h
Stopping the engine
Turn the ignition key to
WARNING
Never switch the engine
A3
A2
A3
Driving176
e applied firmly to prevent the
y rolling away.
r up all the way.
and at the same time press in the release
w-.
pressed and push the lever all the way
Fig. 149 Detailed view of the centre console: Hand- brake on
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 176 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
The brake servo and the power steering system work only when the engine is running. You need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle when the engine is switched off. Given that you will be unable to steer and brake as usual, this could lead to a risk of accidents and injuries.
Caution If the engine has been running under high load for a long time, there is a risk
of heat building up in the engine compartment after the engine has been
switched off; this could cause engine damage. Therefore, you should let the
engine idle for approximately 2 minutes before you switch it off.
Note After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It may also start running again
after some time if the coolant temperature rises due to a build-up of heat
under the bonnet, or if the engine is already warm and the engine compart-
ment is heated up further by direct sunlight.
Handbrake
Handbrake
The handbrake should b
vehicle from accidentall
Applying the handbrake
Pull the handbrake leve
Releasing the handbrake
Pull the lever up slightly
button fig. 149 -arro
Keep the release button
down .
WARNING (continued)
Driving 177
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
at the, if the vehicle moves, it will do so towards
ecially children) in the vehicle when it is delay assistance in an emergency, potentially
upervised in the vehicle. They could release ever, moving the vehicle and causing an
tic system
to help you when parking or manoeuvring in
he equipment fitted on your vehicle.
s an acoustic warning if there are any obstacles
178.
arking System Plus warns you acoustically and
ront of and behind the vehicle page 178.
g aid works properly, the sensors must be kept
e.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 177 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
If you drive by mistake with the handbrake still applied, you will hear a
warning buzzer and the display will show the message:
Handbrake on
The handbrake warning switches on after driving for 3 seconds at speeds
above 5 km/h.
The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied
with the ignition on.
WARNING
Please note that the handbrake should be released all the way. If it is only partially released, this will cause rear brakes overheating, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an accident.
Caution Once the vehicle has come to a standstill, always apply the handbrake firmly
and then, on a manual gearbox, engage a gear, or select P on an automatic.
Parking
The following points will ensure there is no risk of the vehicle
rolling away accidentally after it is parked:
Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Switch the engine off.
On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear or on an automatic move
the selector lever to P .
When parking on slopes:
Turn the steering wheel so th
the curb.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (esp locked. Locked doors could putting lives at risk.
Never leave children uns e.g. the handbrake or gear l accident.
Parking aid acous
General notes
Various systems are available
tight spaces, depending on t
The SEAT Parking System give
behind your vehicle page
When you are parking, SEAT P optically about obstacles in f
Note To ensure the acoustic parkin
clean and free of snow and ic
Driving178
detected by the system may no longer be
e vehicle moves closer, so the system will not
ain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences,
railer draw bars, etc) may not always be
e care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
n towing page 179.
us*
s is an acoustic parking aid.
t and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect
y acoustic signals. The measuring range of the
ly:
th increasing frequency as you approach the
ess than 0.30 m from the obstacle the warning
Stop moving immediately!
eps will be gradually reduced after about 4
at a constant distance from a detected
permanent acoustic signal).
e 0.90 m
ntre 1.20 m
e 0.60 m
ntre 1.60 m
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 178 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
SEAT Parking System*
SEAT Parking System is an acoustic parking aid.
Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle,
you are alerted by acoustic signals. The measuring range of the sensors starts
at approximately:
The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the
obstacle. When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m away from the obstacle, the
warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected
obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).
The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
You will hear a brief confirmation tone.
WARNING
The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered. Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.
Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear view mirrors.
Caution Please note that low obstacles
registered by the sensors as th
give any further warning. Cert
chains, thin painted posts or t
detected by the system, so tak
Note Please refer to the notes o
SEAT Parking System Pl
SEAT Parking System Plu
Sensors are located in the fron
an obstacle, you are alerted b
sensors starts at approximate
The acoustic signals sound wi
obstacle. When the vehicle is l
tone will sound continuously.
The volume of the warning be
seconds if the vehicle remains
obstacle (it does not affect the
Rear Side 0.60 m
Centre 1.60 m
Front Sid
Ce
Rear Sid
Ce
Driving 179
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
eplacement for driver awareness. The driver is afe parking and other manoeuvres.
pots in which obstacles are not registered. ildren and animals because the system will not pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-
on the area around the vehicle and make full
s detected by the system may no longer be
the vehicle moves closer, so the system will not
tain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences,
trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be
ke care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
n towing page 179.
he picture display.
ing aid sensors are not enabled when you select
ch . This function may not be guaranteed on
actory fitted. This results in the following restric-
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 179 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Activating/Deactivating
Activating
Engage reverse gear or
Press the button on the centre console fig. 150 or on the
gear selector gate. You will hear a brief confirmation tone and the
LED on the switch will light up.
Deactivating
Drive forward faster than 10 km/h, or
Press the button or
Switch off the ignition or
Disengage the reverse gear.
WARNING
The parking aid is not a r personally responsible for s
The sensors have blind s Always look out for small ch always detect them. Always dents.
Always keep a close eye use of the rear view mirrors.
Caution Please note that low obstacle
registered by the sensors as
give any further warning. Cer
chains, thin painted posts or
detected by the system, so ta
Note Please refer to the notes o
There is a slight delay in t
Towing bracket*
In towing mode, the rear park
reverse gear or press the swit
towing brackets that are not f
tions:
Fig. 150 Centre console: switch for parking aid
Driving180
instrument panel lights up when the cruise
control system should not be used in dense s (with ice, slippery surfaces, loose grit or n accident.
rbox: do not go into neutral if the device is
leasing the clutch, as the engine will increase
ditions, could break down.
ntain a constant speed when travelling down
to accelerate under its own weight. Change
e foot brake to slow the vehicle.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 180 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
SEAT Parking System*
There is no distance warning.
SEAT Parking System Plus*
There is no rear distance warning. The system will still give a warning when
obstacles are detected while driving forward.
Fault messages*
If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and the LED on the button* starts
flashing when you switch on the parking aid, a system fault has occurred.
Please have the fault corrected by a Dealer or qualified workshop.
Note If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be
indicated by the flashing LED on the switch * the next time you switch on
the parking aid.
Cruise control*
Introduction
The cruise control system allows you to maintain a constant
speed.
Using this system, any speed over 30 km/h can be kept constant, as long as
the engine power allows it. This is subject to power output and braking ability
of the engine. This helps to reduce fatigue, especially on long journeys.
The indicator lamp on the
control system is operating.
WARNING
For safety reasons, the cruise traffic or poor road condition gravel), as this could cause a
Caution In vehicles with a manual gea
enabled without previously re
its revs and, under certain con
Note The cruise control cannot mai
steep hills. The vehicle tends
down to a lower gear or use th
Driving 181
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
eed
eed can be adjusted up or down as
towards fig. 151 .
ore the current cruising speed.
n towards fig. 151 .
ore the current cruising speed.
et speed in steps of 2 km/h by briefly
up towards fig. 151 .
et speed in steps of 2 km/h by briefly
down towards fig. 151 .
tor pedal momentarily to increase speed. The
d will be automatically resumed when the accel-
ds the programmed speed by more than 10
s, the programmed speed will be deleted. You
eed again.
A+
A-
A+
A-
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 181 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Setting the speed
The desired cruising speed has to be stored in the memory.
Drive at the desired speed.
Pull the lever to position fig. 151 to activate the
system.
Briefly press button .
When button is released, the current speed is stored in the memory and
the vehicle will then maintain this speed.
Adjusting the stored sp
The desired cruising sp
required.
Acceleration
Move the lever up
Release the lever to st
Deceleration
Move the lever dow
Release the lever to st
Pressing lever briefly
You can increase the s
pressing the lever
You can decrease the s
pressing the lever
You can also use the accelera
previously programmed spee
erator pedal is released.
However, if the vehicle excee
km/h for more than 5 minute
will then need to enter the sp
Fig. 151 Controls for the cruise control system
AA A1
AB
AB
AA
AA
AA
AA
AA
Driving182
ed only if this is not excessive for the current o so could result in an accident.
control
181, fig. 151 to position (click stop
nary
A2
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 182 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Deactivating the cruise control temporarily
Press the brake pedal or
The clutch or
Press the lever fig. 152 to position (click stop not
engaged).
Any intervention of the TCS or the ESP will switch off the cruise
control.
The speed stored at this point remains in the memory if the system is only
temporarily deactivated.
To resume the programmed cruising speed, release the clutch or brake pedal
and pull the lever to position .
If no speed was stored when the system was temporarily disabled, a new
speed can be set as follows: drive at the desired cruising speed and briefly
press button page 181, fig. 151 (SET).
WARNING
Retrieve the programmed spe traffic conditions. Failure to d
Deactivating the cruise
While driving
Move lever page
engaged).
While the vehicle is statio
Switch the ignition off.
Fig. 152 Controls for the cruise control system
AA Aa
AA Ab
AB
AA
Driving 183
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ing, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a tch released.
gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-
he gear lever while driving. The pressure of your
wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
should always depress the clutch fully to avoid
ge.
the clutch on hills. This causes premature wear
x*
(7-speed gearbox)
earbox
an electronically controlled continuously vari- ic). Unlike conventional automatics, the gear
steps but continuously variable. This gives
akes for better fuel economy.
ratio and shifts up or down automatically
programmes stored in the control unit
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 183 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Manual gearbox
Driving with a manual gearbox
Engaging the reverse gear
The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the
clutch down thoroughly.
Place the gear lever into neutral and push the lever downwards.
Slide the gear lever to the left, and then into the reverse position
shown on the gear lever.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds
with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.
The reverse lights light up when the reverse gear is selected and the ignition
is on.
WARNING
When the engine is runn gear is engaged and the clu
Never select the reverse dent.
Note Do not rest your hand on t
hand could cause premature
When changing gear, you
unnecessary wear and dama
Do not hold the vehicle on
and damage to the clutch.
Automatic gearbo
Introduction
multitronic, tiptronic
Vehicles with multitronic g
The vehicle is equipped with
able transmission (multitron
ratios are not shifted in fixed
smoother transmission and m
The gearbox selects the gear
according to the gear change
page 188.
Fig. 153 Detailed view of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox
Driving184
e pedal.
rlock button (the button on the selector
selector lever to the desired position, for
the interlock button.
engage the gear (a slight movement can
press the accelerator .
hold the vehicle when stationary (for
).
rom rolling away, apply the parking brake
eep gradients .
te as normal, the parking brake will auto-
nd the vehicle will start moving.
e pedal .
.
rlock button, move the selector lever to P
k button.
d when the selector lever is at P or N.
to move the selector lever to P. On slopes, first
then put the selection lever into the P position.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 184 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
If desired, you can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode) page 189.
Please note that in vehicles with a multitronic gearbox, torque is trans-
mitted via a multi-plate clutch, and not via a torque converter as on conven-
tional automatics. This means that the vehicle will not creep as much as
conventional automatics when the engine is idling if you stop temporarily
with the selector lever in position D, S or R.
Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox
The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled 7-speed automatic
gearbox. The gearbox changes up and down automatically.
If desired, you can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode) page 189.
Driving instructions
The gears are changed automatically.
Starting the vehicle
Press and hold the brak
Press and hold the inte
lever handle), move the
instance D, and release
Wait for the gearbox to
be felt).
Release the brake and
Stopping briefly
Apply the foot brake to
instance at traffic lights
To prevent the vehicle f
before moving off on st
As soon as you accelera
matically be released a
Parking the vehicle
Press and hold the brak
Apply the parking brake
Press and hold the inte
and release the interloc
The engine can only be starte
On level ground it is sufficient
engage the parking brake and
Fig. 154 Detailed view of the centre console: Selector lever with lock button
Driving 185
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
s
he selector lever positions.
ition is shown on the instrument panel display.
mechanically. The parking brake should only be
ady stopped .
ton on the selector lever handle) must be
al must be depressed before moving the
of position P. This is only possible when the igni-
d the gearbox automatically selects the lowest
ged only when the vehicle is stationary and the
Fig. 155 Display: Selector lever positions
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 185 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
This avoids overloading the locking mechanism and it will be easier to move
the selector lever from position P.
Vehicles with multitronic gearbox: Your vehicle is equipped with the hill hold assist function which makes it easier to start off on a slope. The system
is activated when you press and hold the brake pedal for a few seconds.
When you release the brake pedal the braking force will be maintained for a
short moment in order to prevent the vehicle rolling back when you drive
away.
WARNING
While you are selecting a gear and the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to do so could result in an acci- dent.
Please note that some power will still be transmitted when you stop temporarily with the selector lever in position D, S or R. Therefore, when stopping you will need to press the brake with the force required to hold the vehicle still. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving, as this could cause an accident.
Vehicles with multitronic gearbox: Please note that some power will still be transmitted when you stop temporarily with the selector lever in position D, S or R. Therefore, when stopping you will need to press the brake with the force required to hold the vehicle still. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Selector lever position
This section covers all t
The current selector lever pos
P - parking lock
This locks the driving wheels
used when the vehicle is alre
The interlock button (the but
pressed in and the brake ped
selector lever either in or out
tion is on.
R - Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engage
gear ratio.
The reverse gear may be enga
engine is idling .
Driving186
rtment) when a gear is engaged with the le could otherwise start moving immediately king brake is engaged) and possibly cause an
the parking brake and put the selector lever the bonnet and working on the vehicle with bserve the important safety warnings gine compartment.
tronic gearbox:
entally to N when driving, release the acceler-
drop to idling before selecting D or S again.
y (and the environment), the gearbox ratios on
that maximum speed is only obtained when
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 186 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
To move the selector lever to position R, press in the interlock button and at
the same time press the brake pedal. Depending on the model, one or two
reverse lights will come on in selector lever position R (when ignition is
switched on).
N - Neutral (idling)
In this position the gearbox is in neutral .
D - Drive (forward)
In this position, the gearbox selects the optimal transmission ratio
depending on the engine load, speed and the dynamic gear regulation
programme (DRP).
Press the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from N to D if the
vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h .
Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountains or towing a
trailer or caravan) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to tiptronic
mode page 189, so that the gear ratios can be selected manually to suit
the driving conditions.
S - Sport position
To drive in sports mode, select the position S. The engine power reserve is
used to its maximum. When accelerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.
Press the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from N to S if the
vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h .
WARNING
Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
In selector position D or S the vehicle must always be held with the foot brake when the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed, and the vehicle tends to creep. The throttle must on no account be opened inadvertently (for instance by
hand from the engine compa vehicle stationary. The vehic (in some cases even if the par accident.
To avoid accidents, apply in position P before opening the engine running. Please o page 229, Work in the en
Note Applies to vehicles with tip
If the lever is moved accid
ator and let the engine speed
For the sake of fuel econom
some models are designed so
the gear lever is in position S.
WARNING (continued)
Driving 187
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
orks if the vehicle is stationary or driving at
er speeds the selector lever lock in the N posi-
ally.
engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly
shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for
e backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow
k engages automatically if the brake pedal is not
position N for more than about a second.
elector lever handle prevents the driver from
ular gears. Press the button in to disengage the
tor lever positions in which the interlock button
in the illustration, highlighted in colour
ey
rned off, the key may be removed only if the gear
the key is not in the ignition, the selector lever
designed to give maximum accelera-
earbox
pressed right down past the point of resistance
ill select a lower gear ratio, depending on road
ile you keep the accelerator depressed the
y controlled to give your vehicle maximum accel-
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 187 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Selector lever lock
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged
inadvertently, so that the vehicle is not set in motion uninten-
tionally.
The selector lever lock is released as follows:
Switch the ignition on.
Press the brake pedal and at the same time press in the interlock
button.
Automatic selector lever lock
With the ignition turned on, the selector lever is locked in the positions P and
N. To remove it from these positions, press on the brake. The following
message appears in the instrument panel as a reminder for the driver when
the selector lever is in position P or N:
WHEN STATIONARY APPLY FOOTBRAKE WHILE SELECTING GEAR
The selector lever lock only w
speeds up to 5 km/h. At high
tion is disengaged automatic
The selector lever lock is not
through position N (e.g. when
instance, to rock the vehicl
or mud. The selector lever loc
depressed and the lever is in
Interlock button
The interlock button on the s
inadvertently engaging partic
selector lever lock. The selec
has to be pressed are shown
fig. 156.
Safety interlock for ignition k
Once the ignition has been tu
selector is in position P. While
is locked in position P.
Kick-down feature
The kickdown feature is
tion.
Vehicles with multitronic g
When the accelerator pedal is
at full throttle, the gearbox w
speed and engine speed. Wh
engine speed is automaticall
eration.
Fig. 156 Selector lever lock functions
Driving188
arbox: the gearbox continuously adapts the
brake pedal is pressed on a downhill gradient
fts to a lower gear ratio. This increases the
x: in mountainous areas, the gearbox adapts
ill gradients. This helps to avoid constant gear
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 188 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resistance
at full throttle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road
speed and engine speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until
the engine reaches maximum rpm.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slippery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.
Dynamic gear control programme (DCP)
The automatic gearbox is controlled electronically.
The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled gearbox. The gear
ratios are selected automatically according to preset gearshift programmes.
When you drive at moderate speeds the gearbox will select the most econom-
ical shift programme. It will then change up early and delay the downshifts to
give better fuel economy.
If you drive at higher speedswith heavy acceleration, if you open the throttle
quickly, or if you use the kick-down or the vehicle's maximum speed, the
gearbox will automatically select the sport programme.
The gearbox is self-adapting, and continuously selects the most suitable shift
programme. At the same time, the driver can also make the gearbox switch to
the sport programme by pressing the accelerator quickly. This makes the
gearbox shift down into a lower gear ratio, allowing a more rapid acceleration
(for instance to pass another vehicle), without having to press the accelerator
all the way down into the kick-down position. After the gearbox has shifted
back up it returns to the original programme, depending on your style of
driving.
Vehicles with multitronic ge
gear ratios to gradients. If the
the gearbox automatically shi
engine braking effect.
Vehicles with tiptronic gearbo
the gears for uphill and downh
changes on uphill gradients.
Driving 189
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ual programme
r from the position D to the right-hand
lector lever has entered the tiptronic rail,
splayed on the screen.
or lever forwards (in the tiptronic gate)
r lever backwards (in the tiptronic gate)
driver can manually choose between eight (in
even (in vehicles with tiptronic) different gear
gramme can be selected either with the vehicle
ox automatically shifts up into the next gear
engine speed is reached.
ower than the gear shown on the instrument
gearbox will only shift down when there is no
he engine.
(for instance when braking), the gearbox auto-
next gear when the minimum engine speed is
ar increases the engine braking effect on down-
pressed right down past the point of resistance
ill select a lower gear ratio, depending on road
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 189 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)
With the manual shift programme (tiptronic) the driver can
manually select pre-programmed gears.
Switching over to the man
Move the selector leve
side. As soon as the se
the gear engaged is di
Shifting up a gear
Briefly push the select
fig. 157 .
Shifting down a gear
Briefly pull the selecto
.
With the tiptronic system, the
vehicles with multitronic) or s
programmes. The manual pro
stationary or on the move.
When accelerating, the gearb
shortly before the maximum
If you select a gear which is l
panel display fig. 158, the
longer a risk of over-revving t
When the vehicle slows down
matically shifts down into the
reached.
Changing down to a lower ge
hill gradients.
When the accelerator pedal is
at full throttle, the gearbox w
speed and engine speed.
Fig. 157 Centre console: Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)
Fig. 158 Display: Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)
A+
A-
Driving190
dle levers
e steering wheel enable the driver to
grammed ratios or gears.
d paddle lever to change down to a
nd paddle lever to change up to a
d when the selector lever is in position D or S,
shift programme (tiptronic).
can, of course, still be operated using the
sole.
Fig. 159 Steering wheel: tiptronic controls
A
A+
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 190 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Back-up programme
A back-up system is in place if a fault should occur in the
control system.
The automatic gearbox switches to the back-up programme if a fault should
occur in the control system. This is indicated by a gear pinion symbol which
lights up on the instrument panel display.
It is still possible to move the selector lever to all positions. The manual shift
programme (tiptronic) is not available when the back-up programme is
active.
Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox: when the selector lever is in position D or S
or in the manual shift programme, the gearbox will remain in 3rd gear if 1st,
2nd or 3rd gears were engaged when the fault occurred. The gearbox will
remain in 5th gear if 4th, 5th or 6th gears were engaged. The gearbox will
then engage 3rd gear when you drive away from a standstill or after the
engine is restarted.
It will still be possible to use reverse gear in the normal way. However, the
electronic lock for reverse gear will be switched off.
Caution Should the gearbox ever switch into the back-up programme, you should take
the vehicle to a technical service or qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Steering wheel with pad
The paddle levers on th
manually select pre-pro
Briefly pull the left-han
lower gear.
Briefly pull the right-ha
higher gear.
The paddle levers are activate
or the position for the manual
The manual shift programme
selector lever in the centre con
Intelligent technology 191
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
BS), the electronic differential lock (EDL) and
S) are all integrated into the Electronic Stability
s data from the three integrated systems. It also
rovided by other high-precision sensors. These
about the vertical axis (yaw rate), lateral accel-
teering wheel angle.
wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
by the driver, and constantly compares them
the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
e vehicle is starting to skid), then the ESP
y braking the appropriate wheel.
ed wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
werves (tendency of the rear to leave the road),
t wheel facing the outside of the bend. If the
ncy to leave the bend), the braking force is
ing the inside of the bend.
with the ABS page 192. If a malfunction
ESP will also stop working.
ically when the engine is started and performs a
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 191 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Practical Tips
Intelligent technology
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)
General notes
The Electronic Stability Programme increases the vehicle's
stability on the road.
The ESP is designed to increase the degree of control in situations where the
vehicle approaches the limits of adhesion, especially when accelerating and
cornering. It reduces the risk of skidding and improves stability in all road
conditions. The system is active across the entire speed range.
The anti-lock brake system (A
the traction control system (TC
Programme.
How it works
The ESP control unit processe
processes additional inputs p
register the vehicle's rotation
eration, brake pressure and s
The system uses the steering
changes of direction desired
with the actual behaviour of
maintained (for instance, if th
compensates automatically b
The forces acting on the brak
condition. If the vehicle over s
the brakes will act on the fron
vehicle under swerves (tende
applied to the rear wheel fac
The ESP works in conjunction
should occur in the ABS, the
Deactivating
The ESP is activated automat
self-test routine.
Fig. 160 Centre console with ESP switch
Intelligent technology192
self-check when the vehicle reaches a road
ay be accompanied by a noise from the ABS
ning very slowly in relation to the road speed
system will reduce the brake pressure on that
re of this adjustment process by a vibration of le noise. This is a deliberate warning to the
heels is tending to lock up and the ABS control
is situation it is important to keep the brake
BS can regulate the brake application, but do
till subject to the physical limits of adhesion. ecially on wet or slippery roads. If you notice
ounteract locked wheels under braking), you tely to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do
res tempt you into taking any risks when result in an accident.
in the ABS, this is indicated by a warning lamp
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 192 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
If required, the ESP can also be enabled and disabled manually by briefly
pressing the button page 191, fig. 160. The ESP warning lamp lights
up when the system is switched off, see page 68.
In general, the ESP should be left switched on at all times. In particular
circumstances where a certain amount of wheel slip is desirable, it may be
advisable to switch off the ESP. Examples:
when driving with snow chains
when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it.
The ESP should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.
WARNING
The ESP is not able to overcome the physical limits of adhesion. Even with ESP, you should always adjust your speed to suit the conditions. Please bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery road surfaces. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up under braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system. However, the ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter stop-
ping distances in all conditions. For instance, on loose gravel or fresh snow
on top of an icy surface (conditions which anyway require extreme care and
reduced speed), the stopping distance with ABS may even be slightly longer.
How the ABS works
The system runs an automatic
speed of about 6 km/h. This m
pump.
When one of the wheels is tur
and is close to locking up, the
wheel. The driver is made awa
the brake pedal and an audib
driver that one or more of the w
function has intervened. In th
pedal fully depressed so the A
not pump the brake pedal.
WARNING
The grip provided by ABS is s Always bear this in mind, esp that the ABS is working (to c should reduce speed immedia not let the extra safety featu driving. Failure to do so could
Note If a malfunction should occur
page 67.
ESP
Intelligent technology 193
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
without the driver's involvement. With the aid
m monitors the rotational speed of the drive
iderable difference in revs is detected (approx.
drive wheels, e.g. when only one part of the
ls is slippery, the system applies the brake to
el so that more of the power is directed to the
orks up to a speed of approx. 80 km/h. The
it is working.
starts spinning (for instance, if one of the drive
ing the accelerator gradually until the vehicle
he braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
to excessive loads. In this case, the vehicle will
the same running properties as those of another
automatically when the brake has cooled down.
niformly slippery surface (for instance all four s the accelerator gradually and carefully. ls may otherwise start to spin. This could . Risk of accident.
d always adjust your speed to suit the road and the extra safety features tempt you into taking re to do so could result in an accident.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 193 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Brake assist system
The brake assist system helps the driver to achieve optimum
braking effect.
The brake assist system helps to increase braking power and thus to achieve
a shorter stopping distance. If the driver presses the brake pedal very quickly,
the brake assist system automatically boosts the braking force to the
maximum level, up to the point where the anti-lock brake function (ABS) inter-
venes to stop the wheels from locking. You should then keep the brake pedal
pressed until the vehicle has braked to the required speed. The brake assist
system switches itself off as soon as you release the brake pedal.
The brake assist system will not be operative if there is a malfunction in the
ABS or the ESP.
WARNING
Please remember that the accident risk always increases if you drive too fast, especially in corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow too close behind the vehicle in front of you. An increased accident risk cannot be compensated even by the brake assist system.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
The electronic differential lock prevents the loss of traction
caused if one wheel starts spinning.
General notes
The electronic differential lock (EDL) helps the vehicle to start moving, accel-
erate and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be
difficult or even impossible.
How it works
The EDL works automatically,
of the ABS sensors, the syste
wheels page 192. If a cons
100 rpm) in the speed of the
surface supporting the whee
slow down the skidding whe
other wheels. The systems w
system will make noise while
Starting the vehicle
If one wheel has less grip and
wheels is on ice), keep press
starts moving.
Overheating of the brakes
To prevent the brake disk of t
out automatically if subjected
continue to run and will have
without EDL.
The EDL will switch on again
WARNING
When accelerating on a u wheels on ice or snow), pres Despite EDL, the drive whee impair the vehicle's stability
Even with EDL, you shoul traffic conditions. Do not let any risks when driving. Failu
Intelligent technology194
e optimal performance during the first 200 km;
wever, the reduced braking capacity may be
the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-
-in.
ads depends a great deal on how you drive and
hicle is operated. Negative factors are, for
short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts
in heavy rain, or after washing the vehicle or
braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or
nd brake pads. In this case the brakes should
pedal several times.
/h and the windscreen wipers are on, the brake
ds the brake discs for a few seconds. This
wing - at regular intervals and allows a faster
n driving on wet roads.
s can also be temporarily reduced if the vehicle
hout using the brakes when there is a lot of salt
se, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads
.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 194 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Note If the ABS warning lamp lights up, this can also mean there is a fault in the
EDL. Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating.
General notes
The traction control system (TCS) is one of the functions incorporated in the
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP).
The traction control system (TCS) helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate
or climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be diffi-
cult or even impossible.
How it works
The TCS acts automatically, without the driver's intervention. With the aid of
the ABS sensors page 192, the TCS monitors the speed of the drive
wheels. If the wheels start to spin, the engine speed is reduced automatically
to match the amount of grip available. The system is active across the entire
speed range.
The TCS works in conjunction with the ABS. If a malfunction occurs in the ABS,
the TCS will also be inoperative.
Note To ensure that the TCS works properly, all four wheels must be fitted with
identical tyres. The difference in size of the wheels may lead to an undesired
reduction in engine power. Also see page 251.
Brakes
General notes
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provid
first they must be run in. Ho
compensated by pressing on
loading the brakes during run
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake p the conditions in which the ve
instance, city traffic, frequent
and stops.
Wet roads or road salt
In certain conditions, such as
driving through water, the full
in winter by ice) on the discs a
be dried by pressing the brake
When the speed is over 80 km
system moves the pads towar
occurs - without the driver kno
response from the brakes whe
The effectiveness of the brake
is driven for some distance wit
on the road in winter. In this ca
has to wear off before braking
Intelligent technology 195
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,
ntervals than to apply the brakes continuously.
le with accessories such as a front spoiler or
that the flow of air to the front wheels is not
kes can overheat.
the driver when braking
e pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The
the engine is running.
move while in neutral, when the engine is uld result in an accident.
ing, e.g. because the vehicle has to be towed or
have to press the brake pedal considerably
k of servo assistance.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 195 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for corrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build
up on the brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently or the brakes are not
used very often.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is
advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times at a
moderately high speed .
Faults in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that
one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest
specialised workshop and have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and
remember that you will have to apply more pressure on the brake pedal and
allow for longer stopping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.
The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.
WARNING
When applying the brakes to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, select a clear, dry road. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other road users. Risk of accident.
Caution Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is
not necessary to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-
ping distances and greater wear.
Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change to a lower gear (or move the gear lever to a lower gear position if
your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking
and prolongs the service life
it is better to brake firmly at i
Note If you wish to equip the vehic
wheel covers, it is important
obstructed, otherwise the bra
Brake servo
The brake servo assists
The brake servo increases th
brake servo works only when
WARNING
Ensure the vehicle does not stopped. Failure to do so co
Note If the brake servo is not work
because it is broken, you will
harder to make up for the lac
Intelligent technology196
electronically adjusts the power
otronic power steering the degree of power
usted electronically according to road speed.
ervotronic system, the power steering will still
assistance will, however, no longer adapt to
nic regulating system is not working properly,
urning the steering wheel at low speeds (for
ore effort will be required than usual. The fault
ified workshop as soon as possible.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 196 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Power steering
Power steering makes it easier to turn the steering wheel
when the engine is running.
Power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the
steering wheel.
Power steering does not work if the engine is off. In this case the steering
wheel requires much more force to turn.
If the steering is held at its turning limit when the vehicle is stationary, this
will place an excessive load on the power steering system. Turning the
steering wheel to its limit places a load on the system, which causes noise. It
will also reduce the idling speed of the engine.
Caution When the engine is running, do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for
more than 15 seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the power
steering.
Note If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off
(for instance when being towed), the vehicle can still be steered. However,
more effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.
If the system is leaking or malfunctioning, please take the vehicle to a
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
The power steering system requires a special hydraulic fluid. The fluid
reservoir is located at the front of the engine compartment on the left
page 301. The correct fluid level in the reservoir is important for the power
steering to function properly. The hydraulic fluid level is checked at the
Inspection Service.
Servotronic*
The servotronic system
assisted steering.
In vehicles equipped with serv
assistance page 196 is adj
If a fault should occur in the s
operate. The degree of power
different speeds. If the electro
this is most noticeable when t
instance when parking), as m
should be corrected by a qual
Driving and the environment 197
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
raking distance
d braking distance are influenced by
oad conditions.
epends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
ends to a great extent on the conditions under
and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
rt distances or have a sporty driving style, we
e thickness of your brake pads checked by an
re frequently than recommended in the Service
for example, after crossing areas of water, in
ashing the vehicle, the effect of the brakes is
re wet or even frozen (in winter). In this case the
essing the brake pedal several times.
d faults in the brake system increase the risk
run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also
s have to be changed further on.
n, or if you are driving on roads which have may be lower than normal.
s are excessively used, they will overheat. teep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 197 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run in over the first 1500 km.
Up to 1000 kilometres
Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.
Do not accelerate hard.
Avoid high engine revolutions.
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres
Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption
reduced.
Braking capacity and b
The braking capacity an
driving situations and r
The efficiency of the brakes d
of wear of the brake pads dep
which the vehicle is operated
drive in town traffic, drive sho
recommend that you have th
Authorised Service Centre mo
Plan.
If you drive with wet brakes,
heavy rainfall or even after w
lessened as the brake discs a
brakes should be dried by pr
WARNING
Longer braking distances an of accidents.
New brake pads must be during the first 200 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when the brake pad
If brakes are wet or froze been salted, braking power
On steep slopes, if brake Before driving down a long s
Driving and the environment198
do not replenish with too much engine oil
start it, use jump leads if necessary
running or loss of power when the vehicle is
iately and have the vehicle inspected at the
general, the exhaust gas warning lamp will
ribed symptoms occur page 66. If this
er the exhaust system and escape into the envi-
ter can also be damaged by overheating.
es very high temperatures! There is a risk of
alytic converter could come into contact with rials under the vehicle.
nderseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the erter or the heat shields on the exhaust
ld catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.
etely dry because the irregularity of the fuel
blems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the
ause overheating and damage the catalytic
vironment ol system is working perfectly, there may be a
ust gas under some conditions. This depends
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 198 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
change down into a lower gear or range (depending on the type of trans- mission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
Never let the brakes drag by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.
If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the efficiency of the brakes.
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please observe the relevant instructions page 223, Technical modifications.
If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.
Exhaust gas purification system
Catalytic converter*
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter
Use only unleaded petrol with petrol engines, as lead damages
the catalytic converter.
Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
For engine oil changes,
page 232.
Never tow the vehicle to
page 291.
If you notice misfiring, uneven
moving, reduce speed immed
nearest qualified workshop. In
light up when any of the desc
happens, unburnt fuel can ent
ronment. The catalytic conver
WARNING
The catalytic converter reach fire.
Never park where the cat dry grass or flammable mate
Do not apply additional u exhaust pipes, catalytic conv system. These materials cou
Caution Never run the fuel tank compl
supply may cause ignition pro
exhaust system, which could c
converter.
For the sake of the en Even when the emission contr
smell of sulphur from the exha
WARNING (continued)
Driving and the environment 199
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
gh sulphur content may significantly reduce the
iculate filter. Your Authorised Service Centre will
tries have diesel with a high sulphur content.
nvironmentally friendly
nmentally friendly driving
ntal pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
rt on your driving style. By adopting an econom-
ting the traffic situation ahead, you can easily
0-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce
are listed below.
situation
n accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
ften and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,
r engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of
and fuel consumption are reduced to zero
).
ergy
l is to change up quickly through the gears.
pm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
first to second gear as quickly as possible. We
ossible, you change to a higher gear upon
e recommended gear indication that appears on
73.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 199 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
on the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be
solved by changing to another brand of fuel.
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the
exhaust gas system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself.
If the driving conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example,
multiple short trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the
indicator for the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light up. This
does not represent a fault, it is a warning that indicates that the filter has not
been able to regenerate automatically and that you must carry out a cleaning
cycle, as indicated in page 80.
WARNING
The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; the vehicle should be parked so that the exhaust pipe does not come into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Otherwise there is a risk of fire.
Caution Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any circumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the
diesel producer in accordance with standard EN 590 is authorised and will
not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.
Using diesel fuel with a hi
working life of the diesel part
be able to tell you which coun
Economical and e driving
Economical and enviro
Fuel consumption, environme
and tyres depends in large pa
ical driving style and anticipa
reduce fuel consumption by 1
pollution while saving money
Drive anticipating the traffic
A vehicle uses most fuel whe
tion, you have to brake less o
let the vehicle roll with a gea ahead. The braking effect ach
brakes and tyres; emissions
(disconnection due to inertia
Change gear early to save en
An effective way of saving fue
Running the engine at high r
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from
recommend that, whenever p
reaching 2000 rpm. Follow th
the instrument panel page
Driving and the environment200
ng resistance, under-inflation also increases
g.
ays be checked when the tyres are cold.
r round as they increase fuel consumption by
put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth
tment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-
orted.
e for the sake of convenience, even when it is
of 100-120 km/h your vehicle will use about
e extra wind resistance caused by the roof rack
ator, which produces electricity. With the need
n is also increased. Because of this, always
when you do not need them. Examples of
lectricity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear
aters*.
p, it is not recommended to disconnect this
the windows when driving at more than 60
resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure can
l will be used and it can burn the clutch plate
.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 200 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at
higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level
crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only
30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the
engine.
The engine takes a very long time to warm up when it is running at idling
speed. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high
during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately
after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you
will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum
reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and
the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera- ture.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not normalise until having
driven approximately four kilometres. This is why we recommend avoiding
short trips whenever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the
tyre pressure is just 1 bar too low, fuel consumption can increase by as much
as 5%. Due to the greater rolli
tyre wear and impairs handlin
The tyre pressures should alw
Do not use winter tyres all yea
up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Every kilo of extra weight will
checking the luggage compar
essary loads are being transp
A roof rack is often left in plac
no longer needed. At a speed
12% more fuel as a result of th
even when it is not in use.
Save electricity
The engine activates the altern
for electricity, fuel consumptio
turn off electrical components
components that use a lot of e
window heating or the seat he
Note If you vehicle has Start-Sto
function.
It is recommended to close
km/h
Do not drive with your foot
make the plate spin, more fue
lining, causing a serious fault
Driving and the environment 201
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
cting the vehicles in transit
on
tensively for energy conversion and building
n reduced
ts
must be taken into consideration:
atalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-
out service station networks selling unleaded
ssible that your vehicle model is not sold, and
available or the Authorised Services can only
ors will gladly provide information about the
ou vehicle requires and also about necessary
ibilities.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 201 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or hand
brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will
prevent the clutch plate from being damaged.
On descents, use the engine brake, changing to the gear that is more suit-
able for the slope. The fuel consumption will be lower and the brakes will not
suffer.
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials
and production of your new Seat.
Design measures for economical recycling
Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling
Modular construction to facilitate dismantling
Increased use of single-grade materials
Plastic parts and elastomers are rated in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO
11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
Nearly all materials used can be recycled
Similar types of plastics grouped together for easy recycling
Recycled materials used in manufacture
Reduction of volatile compounds in plastics
CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioner
Compliance with prohibited materials regulation: cadmium, lead, mercury,
chrome VI.
Manufacturing methods
Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts
Solvent-free cavity sealing
Solvent-free wax for prote
Solvent-free adhesives
No CFCs used in producti
Surplus materials used ex
materials
Overall water consumptio
Heat recovery systems
Use of water-soluble pain
Driving abroad
Observations
To drive abroad, the following
For vehicles fitted with a c
available for the journey. See
tions will have information ab
fuel.
In some countries, it is po
therefore spare parts are not
carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distribut
technical preparations that y
maintenance and repair poss
Driving and the environment202
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 202 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
lenses. Further information is available at your Authorised Service Centre.
In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the rotation system must previously be
disconnected. To do this, please go to a specialised workshop.
Trailer towing 203
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
oints which need to be checked before
an.
permitted trailer weights page 301.
ermitted trailer weight.
p to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you
gly steeper gradients.
listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
increasing altitude the engine power and there-
ility are impaired because of the reduced air
weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
ler must be reduced by about 10% for every
thereof). This figure refers to the combined
e and (loaded) trailer.
ad that appear on the identification plate of the
ation purposes only. The correct figures for your
lower than these figures for the towing bracket,
ocuments and on page 294. Also refer to
so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
trailer must be secured to prevent them
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 203 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Trailer towing
Trailer towing
Technical requirements
The towing bracket must meet certain technical requirements.
Your vehicle is intended mainly for transporting passengers and luggage.
However, if suitably equipped, it can also be used to tow a trailer or caravan.
If your vehicle has been factory-supplied with a towing bracket, all of the
necessary technical and legal aspects for trailing towing have been taking
into account during manufacturing.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole socket for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer has a 7-pole connector you
can use an adapter cable. This can be purchased at an Authorised Service.
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
done according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer
page 212.
WARNING
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the installation should be carried out by a qualified workshop.
Particularly in high outdoor temperatures, it is not possible to drive up long steep gradients without a suitable cooling system. The engine would heat up.
Incorrect installation can result in a safety risk!
Notes on towing
There are a number of p
towing a trailer or carav
Observe the maximum
Trailer weight
Never exceed the maximum p
If you do not load the trailer u
can then climb correspondin
The maximum trailer weights
1000 m above sea level. With
fore the vehicle's climbing ab
density. The maximum trailer
weight of the vehicle and trai
subsequent 1000 m (or part
weight of the (loaded) vehicl
The figures for the drawbar lo towing bracket are for certific
specific model, which may be
are given in the registration d
page 301.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer
possible. Loads carried in the
moving.
Trailer towing204
additional attention by the driver.
aded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
cannot be avoided, drive extra slow to allow for
ution.
trailer is reduced with increasing speed. There-
e at the maximum permissible speed in unfa-
d conditions. This especially applies when
ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
tabilise the trailer by accelerating.
in good time. If towing a trailer with an inertia hen harder. This will prevent brake tapping by
ck. Select a low gear in due course before
This enables you to use the engine braking to
reduced by stabiliser aids. We recommend
when towing trailers with a high trailer weight.
stalled at a Technical Service.
t weather with the engine running fast in low
on the coolant temperature gauge page 60.
the needle moves to the right end of the scale.
p in the instrument panel should start
let the engine cool down by running it at idling
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 204 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
Tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressures on your vehicle, and adjust for full load conditions
(refer to the sticker listing the tyre pressures on the door pillar). It may also be
necessary to adjust the tyre pressures on the trailer according to the recom-
mendations of the trailer manufacturer.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the
standard mirrors. If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors
fitted. The two exterior mirrors should be fitted on folding arms. Adjust the
mirrors to give sufficient rear vision.
Headlights
Before starting a journey, check the headlight beam settings with the trailer
hitched up. If necessary, alter the height of the headlight beams by means of
the headlight range control. See page 120.
Power supply
When you remove the ignition key, the power supply to the trailer is inter-
rupted.
Removable ball joint coupling
Vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket are equipped with a removable
ball joint coupling. This is stored in the spare wheel well in the luggage
compartment together with the necessary fitting instructions.
Note If you frequently tow, we recommend you also have the vehicle serviced
between services.
Notes on towing
Towing a trailer involves
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a lo
unfavourable. However, if this
the unbalanced weight distrib
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and
fore, it is advisable not to driv
vourable road, weather or win
driving downhill.
You should always reduce spe
sign of swaying. Never try to s
Anticipate hazards and brake
brake, first brake gently and t
the trailer wheels when they lo
going down a steep downhill.
slow down the vehicle.
Swaying and pitching can be
having stabiliser aids installed
They can be purchased and in
Reheating
When climbing long hills in ho
gear, you should keep an eye
Reduce speed immediately if
If the temperature warning lam
flashing, stop the vehicle and
speed for a few minutes.
Trailer towing 205
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
um of three bicycles may be used.
ounted on the towing bracket
nly mount equipment (e.g. bicycle rack) on the
n officially approved.. If you wish to attach other
that it has been approved by the manufacturer
. If you mount unsuitable equipment, this can
bracket. In an extreme case, damage to the
t to break .
ipment which has not been approved by SEAT, ble for use on SEAT vehicles.
cessories can result in severe damage to the break while pulling a trailer. Risk of accident.
nd when fitting and removing the ball joint. ing device, no longer guaranteeing the correct t. This could lead to an accident.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 205 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Equipment and accessories
Before mounting equipment and accessories (e.g. bicycle
rack) please observe the following notes.
The equipment/accessories mounted must not protrude more than 700 mm
from the ball joint .
The total weight (mounted equipment plus the load) must not exceed 75 kg.
The maximum load depends on where the centre of gravity lies.
The maximum weight decreases as the distance between the centre of gravity
and the ball joint increases.
The following limits apply:
If the distance is 300 mm, the total weight (incl. the equipment mounted)
must not exceed 75 kg.
If the distance is 600 mm, the total weight (incl. the equipment mounted)
must not exceed 35 kg.
Only bicycle racks for a maxim
Equipment and accessories m
SEAT recommends that you o
towing bracket which has bee
equipment please make sure
for use on the towing bracket
cause damage to the towing
towing bracket could cause i
WARNING
If you wish to mount equ please ensure that it is suita
The use of unsuitable ac towing bracket, which could
Never use tools of any ki This would damage the lock working order of the bracke
Fig. 161 Load distribu- tion of equipment and accessories
A1
A1
AA
AB
Trailer towing206
equipment, ensure that it is suitable for
wing bracket and that it is approved for this
o the ball joint from unsuitable equipment, we
r the towing bracket be purchased through
page 223.
the towing bracket of your vehicle if you are bracket. The use of unsuitable accessories
o the towing bracket, which could break while ent.
d when fitting and removing the ball joint. ng device, no longer guaranteeing the correct This could lead to an accident.
r repair the ball joint or other towing bracket
ulties when using the towing bracket, or
perly, contact a qualified workshop.
check that the ball joint is secured properly
oint with the caravan / trailer still hitched or
ccessory still attached.
e ball joint when you are not towing a trailer.
e is properly fitted on the mounting fixture on
re washing the vehicle with pressurised steam
er piece is fitted correctly onto the mounting
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 206 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Removable towing bracket
Introduction
Special care is required when fitting and removing the towing
bracket.
The removable ball joint attachment for the towing bracket is stored under the
floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Vehicles with a spare wheel fig. 162.
The ball joint can be fitted and removed by hand.
Accessories mounted on the towing bracket
Please note that the ball joint attachment can be damaged by using unsuit-
able equipment that is mounted onto the towing bracket (e.g. bicycle rack).
Due to the material construction, such damage to the towing bracket dramat-
ically increases safety risks and in extreme cases could lead to breakage of
the towing bracket while towing .
Therefore, before buying such
mounting onto the vehicle's to
purpose. To prevent damage t
recommend that equipment fo
your SEAT Dealer. Also see
WARNING
Only mount equipment on certain it will not damage the can result in severe damage t pulling a trailer. Risk of accid
Never use tools of any kin This would damage the locki working order of the bracket.
Note Do not attempt to modify o
components.
Should you have any diffic
suspect that it is not fitted pro
Before setting off, always
page 209.
Never disengage the ball j
with a bicycle rack or similar a
It is advisable to remove th
Make sure that the cover piec
the vehicle.
Remove the ball joint befo
equipment. Make sure the cov
fixture.
Fig. 162 Luggage compartment: Spare wheel with towing bracket
Trailer towing 207
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ep 2)
Fig. 164 Removable towing bracket: Ball joint
Fig. 165 Removable towing bracket: Ball joint
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 207 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Fitting the ball joint (step 1)
Remove the cover piece fig. 163 on the mounting fixture
below the bumper as far as it will go. The cover piece is held
automatically in the open position.
Make sure the mounting fixture is clean. If not, clean it .
Cont page 207, Fitting the ball joint (step 2).
WARNING
It is important to keep the mounting fixture clean. Otherwise the ball joint may fail to engage safely and securely. This could lead to an accident.
Fitting the ball joint (st
Fig. 163 Rear bumper: Open the cover piece
A2
A1
Trailer towing208
p 3)
Fig. 166 Removable towing bracket: Setting the spring mechanism to the "ready" position
Fig. 167 Removable towing bracket: Inserting the ball joint
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 208 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Make sure the ball joint is clean and undamaged
Check the locking pin , release pin , shaft section and
knob page 207, fig. 164 on the ball joint to make sure they
are clean and undamaged.
The spring mechanism inside the ball joint must be in the ready position
Check that the red marking page 207, fig. 165 on the knob
is inside the black zone marked on the ball joint.
Check that the locking pin is inside the holes in the shaft
section of the ball joint.
Check that the knob protrudes visibly from the ball joint, so that
there is a clear gap between the knob and the ball joint.
The ball joint can only be installed if the internal spring mechanism is in the
ready position.
Cont page 208, Fitting the ball joint (step 3).
Fitting the ball joint (ste AA AB AC
AD
AA
AB
AC
Trailer towing 209
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ep 4)
Fig. 168 Removable towing bracket: Safety check
Fig. 169 Rear bumper: Pulling down the power socket
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 209 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Setting the spring mechanism to the ready position (if required)
Insert the key page 208, fig. 166 in the lock on the knob
and turn it towards the red marking.
Pull out the knob in direction , hold and turn in direction
until the locking pin engages and the release pin moves
out visibly .
Inserting the ball joint
With the spring mechanism in the ready position, insert the ball
joint into the mounting fixture and push it upwards page 208,
fig. 167 in the direction indicated (arrow) . It should lock
into position automatically. You should now clearly hear it click
into place.
Lock the ball joint by turning the key to the green marking.
Remove the key.
Cont page 209, Fitting the ball joint (step 4).
WARNING
If it is not possible to set the spring mechanism to the ready position as described above, do not use the ball joint. Please contact a qualified work- shop.
To avoid injury, keep your hands away from the knob or cover piece when inserting the ball joint in the mounting fixture. Otherwise, you could be injured.
Fitting the ball joint (st A1
AA AB
A2 A3
Trailer towing210
k fig. 170 on the knob.
turning the key to the red marking.
Fig. 170 Removable towing bracket: Removing the ball joint
Fig. 171 Rear bumper: fitting the cover piece
A1
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 210 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Safety check
Check that the green marking page 209, fig. 168 on the
knob is inside the black zone marked on the ball joint.
Check that the knob is directly against the ball joint, so that there
is no gap between the knob and the ball joint -arrow-.
Check that the ball joint is locked and the key is removed so that
the knob cannot be pulled out .
Check that the ball joint fits tightly in the mounting fixture (try
moving it about to check).
Towing socket
To plug in the electrical connection for the trailer, pull down the
socket below the bumper page 209, fig. 169.
If the safety check is not satisfactory, the ball joint must be fitted again prop-
erly.
WARNING
To avoid accidents, the ball joint must meet all the safety requirements listed in the safety check. The towing bracket must not be used if any one of these requirements is not met. If this is the case, you should contact a qualified workshop.
Removing the ball joint
Insert the key in the loc
Unlock the ball joint by
AA
Trailer towing 211
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 211 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Take hold of the ball joint and pull out the knob in direction .
Keep hold of the knob and turn it as far as it will go in direction
.
Release the knob. The spring mechanism will remain in the ready
position .
Pull the ball joint down out of the mounting fixture
page 210, fig. 171. The cover piece will cover the mounting
fixture automatically .
Put away the ball joint attachment under the floor panel in the
luggage compartment.
Move the socket back up to its original position.
WARNING
To avoid injury, keep your hands away from the locking pin and the release pin when releasing the locking mechanism.
Make sure that the cover piece is properly engaged on the mounting fixture on the vehicle. Otherwise the ball joint may fail to engage securely if dirt accumulates in the mounting fixture.
AA
AB
A1
A2
Trailer towing212
Fig. 172 Attachment points for towing bracket
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 212 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Trailer towing 213
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ncorrectly installed, there is serious danger of
se observe the instructions provided by the bracket.
rrectly installed, this could cause damage to the
trailer bracket is not recommended due to the
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 213 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the
vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and
including the maximum drawbar load.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
403
629 mm
1112 mm (vehicle with max. load)
from 350 to 420 mm (vehicle with max. load)
1000 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre
to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting
of a separate warning lamp).
Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and a power socket must be connected to the vehicle's elec-
trical system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools.
Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment
points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop.
If the towing bracket is i accident.
For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing
Caution If the power socket is inco
vehicle's electrical system.
Note For the Sport finish, fitting a
design of the bumpers.
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
WARNING (continued)
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning214
The use of certain products may produce d be used in well ventilated areas.
, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other c and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-
cle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch dbrake firmly and remove the key from the
mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
our vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty
vironment for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones
nvironment.
ducts should not be disposed of with ordinary
disposal information on the package.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 214 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Vehicle maintenance
Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect your vehicle against the harmful effects of the envi-
ronment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer
substances such as insect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road
dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materials
remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High
temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive
effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Products for vehicle maintenance
Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used them up.
WARNING
Car care products can be toxic. Because of this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of chil- dren. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using vehicle care products. Improper use could cause health prob-
lems or damage the vehicle. noxious vapours; they shoul
Never use fuel, turpentine volatile fluids. These are toxi sion.
Before washing your vehi the engine off, apply the han ignition.
Caution Never attempt to remove dirt,
Never use a dry cloth or spong
paintwork or the windows of y
of water.
For the sake of the en When purchasing products
which are not harmful to the e
The waste from car care pro
household waste. Observe the
WARNING (continued)
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 215
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove
ht pressure.
ove often with clean water.
hould only be used for very stubborn dirt.
anels etc. until last, using a different
ughly with water.
gently with a chamois leather.
ry the rubber seals and their surfaces to
zing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
udden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes
es page 197, Braking capacity and
he ignition switched off.
rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of
e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 215 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Vehicle exterior maintenance
Automatic car wash tunnel
The vehicle can normally be washed without problem in an
automatic car wash.
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed
without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, the paintwork
wear depends to a large extent on the kind of the car wash tunnel, the
brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative
products.
Before going through a vehicle wash, be sure to take the usual precautions
such as closing the windows and sunroof.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash tunnel operator.
After washing, the brakes could take some time to respond as the brake discs
and pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking
several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
Washing by hand
Vehicle washing
First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off.
Clean your vehicle from
or a brush. Use very lig
Rinse the sponge or gl
Special car shampoo s
Leave the wheels, sill p
sponge or glove.
Rinse the vehicle thoro
Dry the vehicle surface
In cold temperature, d
prevent them from free
seals.
After washing
After washing, avoid s
by braking several tim
braking distance.
WARNING
Wash your vehicle with t
Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.
Water, ice and salt on th accident.
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning216
jet nozzles (rotating jets) .
dden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes
s page 197.
oncentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at short cleaning times, visible and invisible s. This may cause an accident.
brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
an 60 C. This could damage the vehicle.
hicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive
es, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is
inted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer
e greater the wear on the material.
ce
the paintwork.
vehicle if water does not form small drops and
s clean.
ts are available at your Authorised Service
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 216 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Caution Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork
or glass on your vehicle.
Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with
a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the
doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the vehicle should be washed only in specially
provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the
sewerage system. In some places, washing vehicles outside wash bays is
prohibited.
Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.
Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted
bumpers.
Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
windows page 217.
Never use concentrated
After washing, avoid su
by braking several time
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a c large spraying distances and damage can occur to the tyre
Water, ice and salt on the accident.
Caution Do not use water hotter th
To avoid damage to the ve
materials such as flexible hos
also important for bumpers pa
the nozzle is to the surface, th
Vehicle paint maintenan
Regular waxing protects
You need to apply wax to your
run off the paintwork when it i
Good quality hard wax produc
Centre.
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 217
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may
e liquid is accidentally spilled.
contain solvents will damage the material.
exterior mirrors
ith commercially available, alcohol based
clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
move snow from the windows and mirrors.
leather to dry the windows. The chamois
aces are not suitable to clean windows because
osits which could smear the windows.
ay to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
ut swinging it.
one remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-
with a special cleaner available in your Author-
osits on the windscreen could cause the wiper
indow cleaner that dissolves wax to the wind-
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 217 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental
contaminants page 214. It is also effective in protecting against minor
scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the vehicle washing tunnel, it is
advisable to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in
your Authorised Service Centre.
The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain
wax compounds to seal the paint page 216, Vehicle paint maintenance.
Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:
Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or
on plastic parts.
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved
solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products.
Caution The use of liquid air freshe
damage the plastic parts if th
Cleaning products which
Cleaning windows and
Cleaning windows
Moisten the windows w
glass cleaner.
Dry the windows with a
Removing snow
Use a small brush to re
Removing ice
Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois
leathers used on painted surf
they are soiled with wax dep
If possible, use a de-icing spr
it in one direction only witho
Use window cleaner or a silic
cone deposits off.
Wax deposits can be removed
ised Service Centre. Wax dep
blades to judder. Adding a w
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning218
, windows, bonnet and tailgate will remain
are treated with a suitable care product (for
o prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
can freeze up in winter.
u should only use spray with lubricating and
h a damp cloth.
h a soft, dry cloth.
ing results, use a specialist chrome cleaning ducts will remove stains from the surface.
surfaces:
ning product on chrome.
me parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 218 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
screen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering, but wax deposits
are not removed.
Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements
inside the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades are essential to provide clear vision.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleaner to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use a
sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn dirt.
Rubber seals maintenance
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The rubber strips on the doors
pliable and last longer if they
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will als
doors will be easier to open. If
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders
To de-ice the lock cylinders yo
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts wit
2. Polish chrome parts wit
If this does not provide satisfy
product. Chrome cleaning pro
Caution To prevent scratching chrome
Never use an abrasive clea
Do not clean or polish chro
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 219
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
gents should not be used. If the protective
lying stones, the damaged area should be
ylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances sible and invisible damage can occur to the ident.
e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of ing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the
mes page 197.
is coated to protect it from chemical
e.
damaged when driving. We recommend you to
under the body and on the running gear, and
e and after the winter season.
our Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair
osion work.
nti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, at shields on the exhaust system. The heat of ngine could cause them to ignite. Risk of fire.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 219 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Steel wheel rims
Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times page 197.
Alloy wheel rims
Every two weeks
Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.
Every three months
Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. If road
salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be
impaired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims.
Car polish or other abrasive a
coating is damaged, e.g. by f
repaired immediately.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a c and short cleaning times, vi tyres. This may cause an acc
Water, ice and salt on th accident. Directly after wash brakes by braking several ti
Underbody protection
The vehicle underbody
and mechanical damag
The protective coating can be
check the protective coating
reinstated if necessary, befor
We recommend you to go to y
work and additional anti-corr
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or a catalytic converter or the he the exhaust system or the e
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning220
fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!
vironment ould be removed when the engine is washed.
eaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
ried out only by a qualified workshop or a petrol
aintenance
anel cleaning
h to clean plastic parts and the dash
satisfactory results, use a special
aning product.
nd the airbag module surface with cleaners s cause the surface to become porous. If the s could become detached and cause injuries.
ain solvents will damage the material.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 220 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the vehicle
is frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after winter.
Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide
the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend
having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment
is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 229.
Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the handbrake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition.
Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
Do not clean the vehicle underbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp- edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.
Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh
For the sake of the en Fuel, grease and oil deposits c
The polluted water must be cl
engine washing should be car
station.
Vehicle interior m
Plastic parts and dash p
Use a clean, damp clot
panel.
If this does not provide
solvent-free plastic cle
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel a containing solvents. Solvent airbag triggered, plastic part
Caution Cleaning products which cont
WARNING (continued)
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 221
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ft, dry cloth.
treated twice a year with a special leather-
in your Authorised Service Centre.
ery sparingly.
ft, dry cloth.
le to preserve the genuine qualities of this
atural properties of the specially selected hides
r has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.
d in everyday use and when looking after the
seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
iation for long periods, the leather should be
ading. However, slight colour variations in high-
rmal.
polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
rn stains should be removed by a qualified
rk properly.
arly and keep them clean.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 221 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Wooden trim cleaning*
Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim cleaning
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
with a special interior cleaner or with dry foam and a soft brush.
Leather cleaning*
Normal cleaning
Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution
(pure liquid soap; two tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
and a cloth.
Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the
seams.
Then wipe off with a so
Leather maintenance
The leather should be
care product, available
Apply these products v
Then wipe off with a so
SEAT does everything possib
natural product. Due to the n
employed, the finished leathe
so a degree of care is require
leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and
the vehicle is under solar rad
protected to prevent it from f
quality natural leather are no
Caution Do not use solvents, wax
products on leather.
To avoid damage, stubbo
workshop.
Seat belt cleaning
A dirty belt may not wo
Check all seat belts regul
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning222
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 222 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Seat belt cleaning
Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.
Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
Allow it to dry.
Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic
belt retractor.
WARNING
Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids.
Check the condition of the seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop.
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.
Caution After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.
Otherwise, the belt retractors could become damaged.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 223
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ponents that do not affect the control of the
r box, laptop, ventilator fan, etc.), must bear the
nufacturer conformity declaration).
ephone holders or cup holders, should never ithin the working range, of the airbags. Other- jury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
ations
ays be carried out according to our
to the electronic components or software in the
ns. Due to the way the electronic components
s, other indirect systems may be affected by the
air safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-
ur vehicle registration documents.
tres cannot be held liable for any damage
/or work incorrectly performed.
nd that all work should be performed by an
ing Genuine SEAT approved parts and acces-
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 223 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and spare parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your vehicle, we recommend you to consult your Authorised
Service Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have
the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and
professionally installed.
Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess
the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved. For
this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts
used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or
are covered by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
driver's control of the vehicle (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the
European Union's authorisation symbol).
Any additional electrical com vehicle itself (e.g. refrigerato
CE mark (European Union ma
WARNING
Accessories, for example tel be fitted on the covers, or w wise, there is a danger of in
Technical modific
Modifications must alw
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications
vehicle may cause malfunctio
are linked together in network
faults. This can seriously imp
nents, and also invalidate yo
SEAT Authorised Service Cen
caused by modifications and
For this reason, we recomme
Authorised Service Centre us
sories.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications224
en*
dscreen have an area without athermic treat-
or fig. 173. This area has been designed for
ponents of fitted devices (e.g. electronic toll
at the electronic toll collection system is fitted
re it works correctly.
Fig. 173 Location of the electronic toll collection system
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 224 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Mobile phones and two-way radios
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of
10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-
ities for retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a specialised
workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while driving you could have an accident.
Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units or within the range of the airbags. There is a high danger of injury if the airbag is triggered.
Note Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
radio.
Athermic windscre
Vehicles with an athermic win
ment above the rear view mirr
the operating of electronic com
collection system).
Note The customer should ensure th
in the correct area to make su
Checking and refilling levels 225
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ckwise into the filler opening until it you
on.
the vehicle on the right.
s operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
ver attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
r vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the
nd further information on fuel.
anually*
ails, the fuel tank flap can be opened manually
e right side trim in the luggage compartment.
locking device back
t the plug.
and can cause serious burns and other inju-
n open flame when filling the fuel tank of the anister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
ents for the use of spare fuel canisters.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 225 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-
mately 70 litres.
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automati-
cally by the central locking.
Unscrewing the tank cap
Press the right side of the flap to open it.
Unscrew the fuel tank cap anti-clockwise.
Hook the cap onto the support fitted to the open tank flap
fig. 174.
Closing the tank cap
Screw the tank cap clo
hear it click into positi
Close the tank flap.
The tank flap is at the rear of
If the automatic filler nozzle i
soon as the tank is full. Ne
fill the expansion chamber. Fu
The correct fuel grade for you
fuel tank flap. Here you will fi
Releasing the fuel tank flap m
If the central locking system f
as follows:
Open the tailgate
Remove the cover from th
Insert a hand and pull the
Open the cap and take ou
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable ries.
Never smoke or use a vehicle, or a spare fuel c
Follow legal requirem
Fig. 174 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached
Checking and refilling levels226
vironment ter the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;
rflow if it becomes warm.
ypes are listed on a sticker inside the
ing to standard DIN EN 228 may be used for
ers (EN = European Standard).
y the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
, unit for determining the knock resistance of
h a higher octane number than the one recom-
ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
er.
ehicle is given in the technical table for the
fications section.
8 may be mixed with small quantities of
nol fuels available at commercial establish-
5, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,
damage the fuel system.
fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 226 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident and leak.
If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following points:
Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.
Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.
If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle
with a diesel engine the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 seconds
without starting the engine. When you then start the engine it may take
longer than normal (up to one minute) for the engine to start firing. This is due
to the fact that the fuel system has to purge itself of air before starting.
For the sake of the en Do not try to put in more fuel af
this may cause the fuel to ove
Petrol
Petrol types
The recommended fuel t
fuel tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol conform vehicles with catalytic convert
Fuel types are differentiated b
= Research Octane Number
petrol). You may use petrol wit
mended for your engine. How
consumption and engine pow
The correct fuel type for your v
engine, in the Technical Speci
Caution Petrol with standard EN 22
ethanol. However, the bioetha
ments with reference E50 or E8
may not be used, as they will
Even one tankful of leaded
of the catalytic converter.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 227
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any diesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
m. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel by the
ance with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628 is
damage to the engine or the fuel system.
en designed to be used exclusively with diesel
N 590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene, fuel
f you accidentally fill up the vehicle with the
rt the engine. Seek assistance from specialised
of these fuels may severely damage the fuel
inter.
iesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at
se the fuel thickens due to wax separation.
l fuel is available in some countries during the
t temperatures as low as -22 C.
matic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold
racteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
country concerned regarding the type of diesel
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 227 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using
petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
For the sake of the environment Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the
catalytic converter.
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences the performance, power and life of the
engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol containing addi-
tives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system
clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,
the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN = European Standard). It must
have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates the
ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on refuelling page 225.
Biodiesel*
Caution Your vehicle is not design
circumstances refuel with bio
the engine and the fuel syste
diesel manufacturer in accord
authorised and will not cause
The diesel engine has be
fuel conforming to standard E
oil or any other type of fuel. I
wrong type of fuel, do not sta
personnel. The composition
system and the engine.
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in w
Winter-grade diesel
When using summer-grade d
sub-zero temperatures becau
Therefore, winter-grade diese
cold months. It can be used a
In countries with different cli
has different temperature cha
Centre or filling stations in the
fuels available.
Checking and refilling levels228
rom inside the vehicle.
pull the lever under the dash panel
ion indicated (arrow).
ock.
Fig. 175 Detail of foot- well area on driver side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 228 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glow plug system, making it well
equipped for operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains
operational to approx. -24 C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is
safe to -15 C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start
at temperatures of under -24 C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for
a while.
Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thinners or similar products) with diesel fuel.
Bonnet
Releasing the bonnet
The bonnet is released f
To release the bonnet,
fig. 175 in the direct
The bonnet springs out of its l
Checking and refilling levels 229
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
u see steam or drips of coolant being released t. Failure to comply could result in burns. Wait
n be seen before opening the bonnet.
partment
ry when working on components in
nt.
er of injury and scalding as well as the risk of orking in the engine compartment (e.g. when . Always observe the warnings listed below and autions. The engine compartment of the vehicle ea
.
ly.
d with a manual gearbox, place the gear lever an automatic vehicle, place the selector lever
ol down.
llowed to approach the engine compartment.
for vehicle operation on the engine compart- e (e.g. coolant).
ort circuits in the electrical system, especially y.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 229 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Opening the bonnet
Before opening the bonnet make sure that the windscreen wiper
arms are not lifted away from the glass. Otherwise the paint may be
damaged.
Lift the bonnet slightly .
Press the release catch under the bonnet upwards fig. 176.
This will release the arrester hook under the bonnet.
Open the bonnet.
The bonnet is held in position by a gas-filled strut.
WARNING
Never open the bonnet if yo from the engine compartmen until no steam or coolant ca
Work in the engine com
Extra caution is necessa
the engine compartme
Always be aware of the dang accident or even fire when w checking and refilling fluids) follow all general safety prec is a potentially hazardous ar
WARNING
Switch the engine off.
Remove the ignition key
Apply the handbrake firm
If your vehicle is equippe in neutral. If you are driving in position P.
Wait for the engine to co
Children should not be a
Never spill liquids used ment, as these may catch fir
Take care not to cause sh when working on the batter
Fig. 176 Release catch under the bonnet
Checking and refilling levels230
ome of the reservoirs mentioned below are
e engine compartment.
sh it down until it overcomes the spring
in the locking part. Do not force it .
nnet must always be completely closed when losing it always check that it is properly flush with the adjacent body panels.
e bonnet is not safely secured when the ehicle immediately and close the bonnet. n an accident.
ial, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
r except for those regions affected by extreme
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 230 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is hot, as the fan could start up suddenly.
Never open the expansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling system is under pressure.
Protect face, hands and arms from any hot steam or hot coolant fluid released by covering the cap with a large, thick rag when opening the expansion tank.
If any tests have to be performed with the engine running, there is an added safety risk from the rotating parts (e.g. drive belts, alternator, radi- ator fan, etc.) and from the high-voltage ignition system.
Observe the following additional warnings if work on the fuel system or the electrical system is necessary:
Always disconnect the battery.
Do not smoke.
Never work near open flames.
Always keep an approved fire extinguisher immediately available.
Caution When topping up fluids, make sure the correct fluid is put into the correct
filler opening. This can otherwise cause serious malfunctions or engine
damage.
For the sake of the environment Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle regularly so that any leaks are
detected at an early stage. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your
vehicle inspected at the workshop.
Note On right-hand drive vehicles s
located on the other side of th
Closing the bonnet
To close the bonnet, pu
pressure.
Let the bonnet engage
WARNING
For safety reasons the bo the vehicle is moving. After c secured. The bonnet must be
Should you notice that th vehicle is moving, stop the v Failure to do so could result i
Engine oil
General notes
The engine comes with a spec
used in all seasons of the yea
cold.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 231
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
the LongLife service interval or it has been
y use oils for fixed service intervals, which also
roperties. In this case, your vehicle must be
of 1 year / 15,000 km (whatever comes first)
gramme.
ces, if the engine oil level is too low
obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can
conforming to the specification ACEA A2 or
CEA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5l).
ate filter*
l engine have a diesel particulate filter and must
engine oil, which has a low level of soot forma-
will cause a higher soot concentration and
refore:
other engine oils.
stances, if the engine oil level is too low
obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, can you
nce) conforming to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01,
EA B3 / ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).
Specification
VW 502 00/ VW 504 00
-
therwise you may damage the engine.
VW 507 00
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 231 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
As the use of good quality oil is necessary for the correct operation and long
service life of the engine, when it becomes necessary to replenish or change
the oil, always use an oil that complies to the VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should
appear on the container of the service oil; when the container displays the
specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that the
oil can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change, indicated in the Maintenance
Programme, be performed by an Authorised Service Centre or a qualified
workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine are listed in page 231, Oil
properties.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on
time/distance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the Maintenance Programme
booklet is QG1, this means that your vehicle has the LongLife service
programmed. If it has the codes QG0 or QG2 the interval service is dependent
on time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife*)
Special oils and processes have been developed which, depending on the
characteristics and individual driving profiles, allow to extend the oil change
service (LongLife service intervals).
Because this oil is essential for extending the service intervals, it must only
be used observing the following indications:
Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service intervals.
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
page 232 and LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to top up (once)
with oil for fixed service intervals (up to a maximum of 0.5 litres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have
disabled (by request), you ma
appear in page 231, Oil p
serviced after a fixed interval
Booklet Maintenance Pro
In exceptional circumstan
page 232 and you cannot
put in a small quantity of oil
ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or A
Vehicles with diesel particul
All Exeo vehicles with a diese
only be filled with VW 507 00 tion. Using other types of oil
reduce the life of the DPF. The
Avoid mixing this oil with
Only in exceptional circum
page 232 and you cannot
put in a small quantity of oil (o
VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or AC
Oil properties
Engine type
Petrol
Diesel. Engines with particu
late filter (DPF)a)
a) Only use recommended oils, o
Checking and refilling levels232
rizontal position.
t idle speed until the service temperature
ipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
it in as far as it will go.
ore and check the oil level page 232,
is too low, add more engine oil
fter topping up the oil level should be in
After topping up the oil level should be in
nd the conditions in which the vehicle is used,
0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be
herefore, the engine oil level must be checked
when filling the tank and before a journey.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 232 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Checking the oil level
Checking oil level
Park the vehicle in a ho
Briefly run the engine a
is reached and stop.
Wait two minutes.
Pull out the dipstick. W
insert it again, pushing
Then pull it out once m
fig. 177. If the oil level
page 233.
Oil level in area
Do not top up oil.
Oil level in area
Oil can be topped up. A
area .
Oil level in area
Oil must be topped up.
area .
Depending on how you drive a
oil consumption can be up to
higher for the first 5000 km. T
at regular intervals, preferably
Oils for LongLife service intervals*
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 504 00
Diesel VW 507 00
Fig. 177 Markings on oil dipstick
Aa
Ab
Aa
Ac
Aa
Checking and refilling levels 233
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
e above area . This could damage the cata-
ontact a qualified workshop to drain the engine
sed with engine oil. Any damage caused by the
ot be covered by the factory warranty.
nvironment of in the drain or on the ground.
irements when disposing of empty oil
ant fluid is to carry heat away from the
ount of antifreeze is decisive in
system from freezing in winter.
system is filled for life at the factory, so no
. The coolant fluid consists of a mixture of water
a glycol-based antifreeze with anti-corrosion
uired depends on the temperatures to be
n. If the antifreeze concentration is too low the
in failure of the cooling system and heater.
Aa
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 233 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Topping up the engine oil
Unscrew cap from oil filler opening page 301, fig. 248.
Carefully put in the specified grade of oil page 231, adding
0.5 litres at a time.
After two minutes, check the oil level once again page 232.
Where necessary, add more engine oil.
Replace the oil filler cap carefully and push the dipstick all the
way in.
WARNING
When refilling with oil, make sure no oil falls onto hot engine parts. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
Caution The oil level must never b
lytic converter or the engine. C
oil if necessary.
No additives should be u
use of such additives would n
For the sake of the e Oil must not be disposed
Always observe legal requ
canisters.
Cooling system
Coolant fluid
The purpose of the cool
engine. The correct am
preventing the cooling
The vehicle's engine cooling
coolant needs to be changed
and antifreeze G12++. This is
additives.
Coolant fluid additive
The amount of antifreeze req
expected in the winter seaso
coolant can freeze, resulting
Fig. 178 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap
Checking and refilling levels234
e use of these antifreezes may lead to a loss of
damage to the engine.
ixed only with antifreeze additives G11, G12
vel
checked visually.
on coolant fluid expansion tank
ngine is cold, it should be between the
s. When the engine is hot, it may be
mark.
rresponding general overview of the engine
Fig. 179 Engine compart- ment: Coolant fluid deposit
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 234 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
The cooling system is filled at the factory with the correct amount of anti-
freeze for the country concerned.
In most cases, the mixture consists of 60% water and 40% antifreeze. This
mixture gives the required antifreeze protection at temperatures down to
-25 C and particularly protects the metal parts of the cooling system against
corrosion. It also prevents scaling and significantly raises the boiling point of
the coolant fluid.
Countries with warm climate
The coolant fluid concentration must not be reduced by adding plain water,
even in the summer or in warm climates. The concentration of the antifreeze
must always be at least 40%.
Countries with cold climate
If greater freeze protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
G12++ antifreeze can be increased. A concentration of 60% offers antifreeze
protection of temperatures down to approx. -40 C. However, the concentra-
tion of antifreeze must not exceed 60%, as the antifreeze protection would
then drop and the performance of the coolant system would suffer.
Vehicles for countries with cold climates (e.g. Sweden, Norway and Finland)
have factory-filled antifreeze protection for temperatures down to -35 C. In
these countries, the concentration of antifreeze should always be at least
50%.
Caution It is advisable to have the cooling system checked before the winter
season to make sure that the antifreeze concentration is adequate for the
conditions to be expected. This applies particularly if you intend to take the
vehicle into a colder climate zone. If necessary, have the antifreeze concen-
tration increased to 50 - 60% as required.
Use only G12++ antifreeze, an additive meeting the TL-VW 774G spec-
ification. Other antifreezes may give considerably inferior corrosion protec-
tion. The damage caused by th
coolant fluid, causing serious
G12++ antifreeze can be m
and G12+.
Checking the coolant le
The coolant level can be
Switch the ignition off.
Check the coolant level
fig. 179. When the e
min and max mark
slightly above the max
Its location is shown in the co
compartment.
Checking and refilling levels 235
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
uid meets the required specifications
. Do not use a different type of antifreeze if
able. In this case, use only water and bring the
up to the correct level as soon as possible.
nt fluid.
ark. Excess coolant fluid is forced out of the
he filler cap when the engine gets hot.
en lost, wait for the engine to cool down before
re to do so could result in serious engine
der pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the gine is hot. Failure to comply could result in
nt fluid can be a health hazard. Therefore, the in the original container in a safe place out of comply could result in poisoning.
nvironment t be used again. Drain off the used coolant into
ose of it in the proper manner (observe environ-
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 235 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The coolant level should be checked with the engine switched off.
The coolant level is monitored by a warning lamp on the instrument panel
display page 78. However, we recommend that it should be checked occa-
sionally.
Coolant fluid loss
Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a leak in the cooling system. In
this case the cooling system should be inspected by a qualified workshop
without delay. It is not sufficient merely to top up the coolant fluid.
If there are no leaks in the system, a loss of coolant fluid can only occur if the
coolant boils and is forced out of the system as a result of overheating.
Caution Radiator sealants must not be added to the coolant fluid. Such additives
could seriously impair the function of the cooling system.
Topping up the coolant fluid
Be careful when topping up with coolant fluid.
Switch the engine off.
Wait for the engine to cool down.
Cover the cap on the expansion tank fig. 179 with a cloth, and
carefully unscrew the cap anti-clockwise .
Add coolant fluid.
Screw on the cap tightly.
Make sure that the coolant fl
page 233, Coolant fluid
G12++ antifreeze is not avail
antifreeze concentration back
Always top up with new coola
Do not fill above the max m
system through the valve in t
If a lot of coolant fluid has be
putting in cold coolant. Failu
damage.
WARNING
The cooling system is un expansion tank when the en burns.
The antifreeze and coola antifreeze should be stored reach of children. Failure to
For the sake of the e Drained off coolant should no
a suitable container and disp
mental regulations).
Checking and refilling levels236
indscreen wiper blades
tem
ent for the windscreen washer
en washer contains the cleaning fluid for the
washer system*. The container is located in the
t). The filler cap is marked with the symbol
is listed in page 301.
ough to clean the glass properly. It is therefore
sher fluid additive (with wax solvent) to the
ze-resistant additive should be used in winter.
Fig. 180 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 236 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Radiator fan
The radiator fan can start running spontaneously.
The auxiliary fan can continue to run for as long as 10 minutes after stopping
the engine, even after the ignition is switched off. It may also start running
suddenly after some while if
Stored heat raises the coolant temperature, or
The hot engine compartment is additionally heated up by the sun.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment be aware that the radiator fan may start running suddenly, leading to the risk of injury.
Washer fluid and w
Windscreen washer sys
Plain water is not suffici
system.
The container for the windscre
windscreen and the headlight
engine compartment (front lef
fig. 180.
The capacity of the container
Plain water on its own is not en
advisable to add a suitable wa
water. A washer fluid with free
Checking and refilling levels 237
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 237 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Caution Never put radiator antifreeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
Never use washer fluid which contains paint thinners or solvents as it can
damage the paintwork.
Checking and refilling levels238
from the windscreen.
on the wiper blade in the direction indi-
ld onto the wiper blade at the same time.
out of its mounting on the wiper arm.
catch on the new wiper blade. The
blade should now be visible.
into the mounting on the wiper arm
on the wiper blade in direction so that
e wiper arm.
down onto the glass.
ar, they should be replaced if they are
re soiled.
esired results, the setting angle of the wind-
correct. They should be checked by a qualified
essary.
good visibility through all windows!
switched on while the front wiper arms are in would return to their park position and bonnet.
AD
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 238 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Changing windscreen wiper blades
If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you
will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper
blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm away
Slide the retainer catch
cated fig. 181 . Ho
Pull the wiper blade
Fitting the wiper blade
Slide back the retainer
mounting on the wiper
Fit the new wiper blade
fig. 182 .
Slide the retainer catch
it clicks into place on th
Fold the wiper arm back
If the windscreen wipers sme damaged, or cleaned if they a
If this does not produce the d
screen wiper arms might be in
workshop and corrected if nec
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have
The ignition must not be a raised position. The wipers damage the paintwork on the
Fig. 181 Removing the wiper blade
Fig. 182 Fitting the wiper blade
AA
AB
AC
Checking and refilling levels 239
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
r blade
e is essential for clear rear vision.
should be replaced immediately.
Fig. 183 Removing rear window wiper blade
Fig. 184 Fitting the rear window wiper blade
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 239 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
To prevent smearing on the windscreen, the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly using a window cleaner solution. If the wiper blades are very dirty (e.g. insects etc.), they should be cleaned using a sponge or cloth. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
For safety reasons, the wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This
could cause damage.
Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service
position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.
Changing the rear wipe
A good rear wiper blad
Damaged wiper blades
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels240
d level
be checked visually.
etween the Min and Max fig. 185 mark-
tly after a period of time due to the automatic
ear. This is quite normal.
n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
ak in the brake system. If the fluid level in the
e indicated by the brake warning lamp
this should happen, take the vehicle to a qual- nd have the brake system inspected.
Fig. 185 Engine compart- ment: markings on brake fluid reservoir
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 240 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm away from the glass page 239, fig. 183
Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove
the blade page 239, fig. 183.
Fitting the wiper blade
With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.
Place the blade as shown in the page 239, fig. 184 and slide
the adapter along until it engages.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or
cleaned if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to a qualified workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the window.
Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
Brake fluid
Checking the brake flui
The brake fluid level can
The brake fluid level must be b
ings.
The fluid level may drop sligh
compensation for brake pad w
However, if the level goes dow
Min mark, there may be a le
reservoir is too low, this will b
page 70 and page 77. If
ified workshop immediately a
Checking and refilling levels 241
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
nvironment st be collected and disposed of according the
EAT service network has the necessary equip-
l for collecting and disposing of this waste
quires specialist knowledge.
nance-free and is checked in the Inspection
battery after 5 years.
, some of the vehicle's functions will become
ows). These functions will require resetting
ed. For this reason, the battery should only be
e's electrical system when absolutely necessary.
e its charge because certain electrical equip-
nt even when the ignition is off. If you park the
e in winter you should take the battery out of
lace protected from frost. This way it will not
. At warm outside temperatures it is sufficient to
inal of the battery. Even when the battery is not
it from time to time.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 241 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Topping up and changing the brake fluid
It is best to have the brake fluid changed by a professional.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Therefore, in the course of time it will absorb
water from the air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
system could corrode. In addition, the boiling point of the brake fluid will be
considerably reduced. This could adversely affect the braking ability in
certain circumstances.
For this reason the brake fluid must be changed periodically.
Your vehicle's Service Plan will tell you when the brake fluid has to be
renewed.
We recommend you have the brake fluid changed as part of a regular Inspec-
tion Service at a workshop. They are familiar with the procedure and have the
necessary special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for
disposing of the old fluid.
Use only approved brake fluid. Specialised workshops are informed about
the factory-approved brake fluid -DOT 4-. The brake fluid must be new.
WARNING
Brake fluid must always be kept closed in its original container. Keep out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
If the brake fluid is left in the system for too long and the brakes are subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the brake system. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle, leading to the risk of accident.
Caution Please note that brake fluid will attack the paintwork on contact.
For the sake of the e The brake pads and fluid mu
applicable regulations. The S
ment and qualified personne
material.
Vehicle battery
General notes
All work on batteries re
The battery is virtually mainte
Services.
We recommend replacing the
Disconnecting the battery
If the battery is disconnected
inoperative (e.g. electric wind
after the battery is reconnect
disconnected from the vehicl
Long periods of non-use
The battery will gradually los
ment continues to draw curre
vehicle for long periods of tim
the vehicle and store it in a p
freeze and become damaged
disconnect the negative term
connected you should charge
Checking and refilling levels242
gs for handling a vehicle battery
ack of the engine compartment page 301.
er of injury and chemical burns as well as the orking on the battery and the electrical
ect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
ive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and batteries. This could spill acid through the eyes immediately for several minutes with
al care immediately. Neutralise any acid ing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with llowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
s and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic ry terminals. High-energy sparks can cause
on
y corrosive and caustic. Wear protective
otection!
n flames and smoking are prohibited!
mixture of gases is released when the battery
y from acid and batteries!
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 242 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Winter operation
The battery is drained more in cold weather, which means that the starting
power is reduced. For this reason, have the battery checked and charged if
necessary before the start of winter.
Replacing the battery
A replacement battery must have the same capacity, voltage and current
rating. It must also have the same dimensions as the original, factory-fitted
battery and have sealed caps. The SEAT batteries which have been specially
developed fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety specifications for
your vehicle.
We recommend you use maintenance-free batteries.
WARNING
All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. If work is required on the battery, this should be performed by a Technical Service or qualified workshop. Danger of caustic burns and explosion!
The battery must not be opened. Never try to change the battery's liquid level. Explosive gas is released from the battery that could cause an explosion.
Caution The battery holder and clamps must always be correctly secured.
Before starting any work on the battery, always observe the warnings
listed under .
For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances including sulphuric acid and lead.
Therefore, they must be disposed of in line with environmental regulations
and must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste. Make sure
disconnected batteries cannot tip over. Sulphuric acid could be spilt!
Important safety warnin
The battery is located at the b
WARNING
Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when w system:
Wear eye protection. Prot particles containing lead.
Battery acid is very corros eye protection. Do not tilt the vents. Rinse battery acid from clear water. Then seek medic splashes on the skin or cloth plenty of water. If acid is swa ately.
Fires, sparks, open flame cables and electrical equipm charge. Never short the batte injury.
Wear eye protecti
Battery acid is ver
gloves and eye pr
Fires, sparks, ope
A highly explosive
is under charge.
Keep children awa
Checking and refilling levels 243
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
is important for reliable starting.
in Important safety warnings for
tery on page 242 and .
and all electrical equipment.
oth battery cables must be disconnected
e, then the positive cable).
bles to the battery terminals, noting the
itive; black or brown = negative).
ry charger to the power socket and switch
ery: switch off the battery charger and
point cable.
charger cables from the battery.
t both battery cables to the battery (first
n the negative cable).
rrent (for instance with a small battery charger)
have to be disconnected. However, both
nnected before fast-charging the battery with a
s follow the instructions given by the manufac-
for a battery is dangerous in Important
a vehicle battery on page 242, as it requires a
sponding level of knowledge. We therefore
ould only be performed by a qualified workshop.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 243 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.
Keep children away from acid and batteries.
Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0 C.
Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace a damaged battery immediately.
Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
the battery from frost. If it freezes it will be damaged.
Charging the battery
A fully-charged battery
Note the warnings handling a vehicle bat
Switch off the ignition
Only if fast-charging: b
(first the negative cabl
Connect the charger ca
colour code (red = pos
Now connect the batte
on.
After charging the batt
disconnect the power
Finally disconnect the
If necessary, reconnec
the positive cable, the
When charging with a low cu
the battery does not normally
battery cables must be disco
high current. However, alway
turer of the battery charger.
The fast-charging procedure
safety warnings for handling
special charger and the corre
recommend that this work sh
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels244
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 244 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
A flat battery can freeze at temperatures of around 0 C. The battery must be
defrosted before charging . It is advisable to replace the battery if it has
frozen, because the ice can crack the battery casing and allow the battery
acid to escape.
The battery caps should not be opened while the battery is being charged.
WARNING
Never charge a frozen battery. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Wheels and tyres 245
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual
ng to one side, this may indicate that one of the
ould be checked immediately by an Authorised
attern
indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
erve the direction of rotation indicated when
tees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
wear.
aximum grip during the first 500 km. Drive d possible accidents.
d tyres. This may cause an accident.
rations or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.
e can be seen on the sticker on the
inflation pressure from the sticker. The
r tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
on the sticker.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 245 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and at a right angle.
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of
rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly
when you replace them.
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres have to be run in.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is o
vibrations or the vehicle pulli
tyres is damaged. The tyres sh
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread p
An arrow on the tyre sidewall
directional tread. Always obs
fitting the wheel. This guaran
planing, excessive noise and
WARNING
New tyres do not have m particularly carefully to avoi
Never drive with damage
If you notice unusual vib driving, stop the vehicle imm
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressur
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre
values refer to Summe
bar to the values given
Wheels and tyres246
g*
oring system constantly checks the
the event of a loss of pressure by means of
instrument panel display.
epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure
ch 10 C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre
eing driven and the tyre pressure will rise
ou should only adjust the tyre pressures when
ly at ambient temperature).
e monitoring system works reliably, you should
t the tyre pressures at regular intervals and
ference values) in the system.
el is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.
e when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!
tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
vironment creased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 246 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure
should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a
journey.
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the
slightly raised pressures of warm tyres .
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre pressure monitorin
The tyre pressure monit
pressure of the tyres.
The system warns the driver in
symbols and messages in the
Note that tyre pressure also d
increases about 0.1 bar for ea
heats up while the vehicle is b
accordingly. For this reason, y
they are cold (i.e. approximate
To ensure that the tyre pressur
check and, if necessary, adjus
store the correct pressures (re
A tyre pressure information lab
WARNING
Never adjust tyre pressur even burst the tyres. Risk of
An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating of bead may be released or the
For the sake of the en Under-inflated tyres lead to in
Wheels and tyres 247
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
rence or frequency characteristic changes on
ressure warning lamp will light up. The fault
rning buzzer. The position of the affected tyre
e tyre is affected) on the centre display of the
frequency characteristics can change if:
w.
ctural damage.
n pressures have been changed without initial-
ng the tyre pressure settings).
the wheels of one axle (e.g. if you are carrying
).
e left wheels is different to the road surface
ong period.
hains.
ettings (initialising the tyre pressure
he wheels of your vehicle, e.g. after modify the
after changing or swapping around wheels
t a standstill and the engine running - press
g lamp will light up. Hold the button down
ng lamp goes out and an acoustic warning is
e button.
extreme stress (e.g. heavy load), the tyre pres-
e recommended value for the maximum load
e inside of the fuel tank flap) and then initialise
n
ion, the tyre pressure warning lamp will light
is a fault in the system if the indicator stays on
on the ignition. The instrument panel also
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 247 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Significant tyre pressure loss
The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure of at least
one tyre is insufficient.
- Stop the vehicle.
- Switch the engine off.
- Check the tyre(s).
- Change the tyre if necessary.
Tyre pressure monitoring (RKA+)*
The tyre pressure monitor display on the instrument panel
indicates if the pressure is too low.
The tyre pressure monitoring system makes use of the ABS sensors to
compare the rolling circumference and the frequency characteristics of the
wheels. If the rolling circumfe
one or more wheels, the tyre p
will also be indicated by a wa
will also be shown (if only on
instrument panel.
The rolling circumference and
the tyre pressure is too lo
the tyre has suffered stru
the wheels or the inflatio
ising the system (see Adjusti
there is a greater load on
more passengers or luggage
the road surface under th
under the right wheels for a l
when driving with snow c
Adjusting the tyre pressure s monitoring system)
After any incident regarding t
tyre pressure page 248 or
page 180 - with the vehicle a
fig. 186. The yellow warnin
for 2 seconds until the warni
given. You can now release th
If the wheels are subjected to
sure must be increased to th
(see the adhesive label on th
the system.
Tyre pressure warning lamp o
When you switch on the ignit
up for about 2 seconds. There
permanently after switching
Fig. 186 Detailed view of the centre console: Button for the tyre pressure monitoring system
Wheels and tyres248
dependent on tyre pressure, driving
Fig. 187 Tyre tread wear indicators
Fig. 188 Diagram for changing wheels
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 248 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
display TMPS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). Please contact the nearest
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
The tyre pressure warning lamp lights up if the tyre pressure on one or
more wheels is significantly lower than the tyre pressure setting which was
confirmed by the driver .
WARNING
If the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up you must slow down immediately and avoid any severe braking or steering manoeuvres. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and check the tyres and their pressure.
The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures. There- fore, the tyre pressure must be regularly checked.
Under certain conditions (e.g. driving at high speeds, on ice and snow or on poor road surfaces) the tyre pressure warning lamp may not light up immediately or not at all.
Please ask your Dealer or qualified workshop whether run-flat tyres can be used on your vehicle. Fitting this type of tyre in an undue manner could lead to your driving licence being taken away from you. Furthermore, it may led to damage to the vehicle or, under certain circumstances, may cause accidents.
If you change normal tyres for run-flat tyres or vice versa, the control unit must be reprogrammed by the Dealer or a qualified workshop.
Note If you did not press the button for the tyre pressure monitoring system to
confirm a new tyre pressure setting after making changes to the tyre pres-
sures or changing one or more wheels, the warning lamp may light up
although the tyre pressures are correct. In this case, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible and, after examining the tyres, press the button for the tyre pres-
sure monitoring system.
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is
style and fitting.
Wheels and tyres 249
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
re balanced. However, various factors encoun-
use them to become unbalanced, which results
e rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
uses excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
essive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ed Service Centre.
accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
ed at the latest when the tread is worn down to ilure to do so could result in an accident. Worn
h speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater
eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes eat. This can cause tread separation and tyre lways observe the recommended tyre pres-
ear, you should have the running gear checked ntre.
oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
res must be replaced immediately!
nvironment ase fuel consumption.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 249 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators
page 248, fig. 187, running across the tread. Depending on the make,
there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on
the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the
positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by
law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-
tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export
countries .
Tyre pressure
Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce the life of the tyres considerably
and also impair the vehicle's handling. The inflation pressures are listed on a
sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
Correct inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds. The
pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before
starting any long journey.
Tyre pressure monitoring (RKA+)*
Monitoring of the tyre pressures is based on the tyre pressures you have
stored. The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function as intended if
you store tyre pressure settings for a normal load, but then drive with the
vehicle fully laden. The tyre pressure must be adapted to the actual load and
stored accordingly in the tyre pressure monitoring system page 247.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable
to change them around as shown page 248, fig. 188. All the tyres will then
last for about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles a
tered in normal driving can ca
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should b
wear on steering, suspension
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment ca
the vehicle. If tyres show exc
ment checked by an Authoris
WARNING
There is a serious danger of
The tyres must be replac the tread wear indicators. Fa tyres do not grip well at hig risk of aquaplaning.
At continuously high spe more. This causes it to overh blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.
If tyres show excessive w by an Authorised Service Ce
Keep chemicals such as
Damaged wheels and ty
For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres will incre
Wheels and tyres250
u contact Technical Service. If more than one
gency conditions, this reduces the distance
conditions
isplayed on the instrument panel, this means
driven in emergency conditions .
of the tyres,
to continue driving even using run-flat tyres?
rogramme (ESP) is out of operation.
ring system* does not work.
severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre
e is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown
uel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
riving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel
ff smoke.
onditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is
speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and bserve legal requirements when doing so.
id manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.
les (for example kerbs) or potholes.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 250 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Run-flat tyres*
Run-flat tyres allow you to continue driving even with a punc-
tured tyre, in the majority of cases.
In vehicles that are factory-fitted with run-flat tyres3) the loss of tyre
pressure is indicated on the instrument panel.
Driving with run-flat tyres (emergency running)
Leave the ESP/TCS (Electronic Stability Programme) switched on,
or switch on page 68.
Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).
Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.
Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from
the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-
tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.
The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:
DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.
The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are
supported on the sides (emergency driving).
The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can
then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for
example, low load), even more.
The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be
checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if
necessary. We recommend yo
tyre is being used under emer
which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency
When loss in tyre pressure is d
that at least one tyre is being
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
smoke is coming from one
there is a smell of rubber,
the vehicle vibrates,
there is a rattling noise.
When is it no longer possible
If the Electronic Stability P
If the tyre pressure monito
If one of the tyres has been
has been badly damaged ther
off and cause damage to the f
It is also advisable to stop d
starts overheating and gives o
WARNING
When driving in emergency c considerably impaired.
The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please o
Avoid sharp turns and rap
Avoid driving over obstac 3) Depending upon version and country.
Wheels and tyres 251
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
following information:
bol
vy-duty tyres.
so indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
l).
xample, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
yres and wheels be carried out by an Authorised
liar with the procedure and have the necessary
as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
e has full information on the technical require-
nging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
use only wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
e on tyres that are more than six years old. If should drive slowly and with extra care at all
ose with an unknown history of use.
ted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the could cause them to overheat.
fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size he same tread pattern.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 251 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
If one or more tyres are being driven in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.
Note The run-flat tyres do not deflate on losing pressure because they are
supported on the reinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyre cannot be
detected with a visual inspection.
Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency
conditions.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe
handling .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
T Speed rating
The tyres could also have the
A direction of rotation sym
Reinforced denotes hea
The manufacturing date is al
on the inner side of the whee
DOT ... 1103... means, for e
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on t
Service Centre. They are fami
special tools and spare parts
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centr
ments when installing or cha
WARNING
We recommend that you approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.
Avoid running the vehicl you have no alternative, you times.
Never use old tyres or th
If wheel trims are retrofit brakes is not restricted. This
All four wheels must be (rolling circumference) and t
WARNING (continued)
Wheels and tyres252
tened correctly, the wheel could become ccident.
lean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil
ch belong to the wheel.
bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the ccident! If the tightening torque is too high,
can be damaged.
ue for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is
e the vehicles handling on snow and
es will considerably improve the vehicle's
er tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
and snow.
o a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
e sticker on tank flap).
all four wheels.
er tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-
adial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
pply to winter tyres.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 252 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.
Note For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from
other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle - for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for
a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel
as soon as possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different
vehicle, even if it is the same model page 223.
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench. The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tigh loose while driving. Risk of a
The wheel bolts must be c to them.
Use only wheel bolts whi
If the torque of the wheel vehicle is in motion. Risk of a the wheel bolts and threads
Caution The prescribed tightening torq
120 Nm.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improv
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyr
handling. The design of summ
pattern) gives less grip on ice
Winter tyres must be inflated t
specified for summer tyres (se
Winter tyres must be fitted on
Information on permitted wint tration documents. Use only r
vehicle documentation also a
Wheels and tyres 253
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ly to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre
trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
ons provided by the snow chain manufacturer.
ains to drive on roads which are free of snow.
ndling, damage the tyres and wear out very
eed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The
ntry should be followed.
sk your Authorised Service Centre for informa-
l, tyre and snow chain size.
15 mm chains
9 mm chains
7 mm chains
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 253 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code page 251, New tyres and wheels determines the
following speed limits for winter tyres:
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These
stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
ments of each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
page 251, New tyres and wheels.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possible. They are quieter, do not wear
so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted on
sizes page 300.
Remove wheel hub covers and
reasons cover caps, available
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Observe the fitting instructi
Caution You must remove the snow ch
Otherwise they will impair ha
quickly.
Note In some countries, the sp
legal requirements of the cou
We recommend that you a
tion about appropriate whee
205/55 R16
225/45 R17
225/40 R18
If and when254
fig. 190 for vehicles with a spare wheel
re repair kit are stored under the floor
artment.
and fold back the floor panel in the
fig. 189.
t screw from cover fig. 189.
ulling up the handle on the box (vehicles
heel).
k.
Fig. 190 Toolbox and jack
AB
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 254 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
If and when
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Tools
The tools and jack are stored under the floor panel in the
luggage compartment.
The tools and jack and for vehicles with the ty
panel in the luggage comp
Take hold of handle
luggage compartment
Unscrew the attachmen
Remove cover.
Release the toolbox by p
equipped with spare w
Take out the tools or jac
The tool kit includes:
Fig. 189 Access to the toolbox and jack
AA AB
AA
If and when 255
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
is stored under the floor panel in the
e and fold back the floor panel in the
.
lity system.
a Tyre Mobility System in case of a puncture.
ists of a container with sealing compound and
required tyre pressure.
lant compound and the compressor are
.
Fig. 191 Tyre Mobility System under floor panel in luggage compartment
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 255 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
A hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps
Box spanner for wheel bolts
A screwdriver with reversible blade
Towing eye
An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Before replacing the jack in the storage bin, wind down the arm of the jack as
far as it will go.
Some of the tools listed are only provided in certain models or are optional
extras.
WARNING
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts, as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the required torque. Risk of accident.
The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be secured by suitable stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
Tyre mobility system
The tyre mobility system
luggage compartment.
Take hold of the handl
luggage compartment
Take out the tyre mobi
Your vehicle is equipped with
The tyre mobility system cons
a compressor to generate the
Instructions for using the sea
included with the sealant can
If and when256
uipped with a spare steel wheel. The spare
he same performance standards as the wheels
f the wheel/tyre dimensions, rubber composi-
ore, note the following restrictions:
esigned only for your vehicle model. Do not
n any vehicle but your own.
rent driving characteristics when the spare
.
ended for temporary use after having a flat tyre.
a normal wheel that has the proper tyre dimen-
l rim wheel is different to that of the other
chains suitable for the other wheels will fit it.
steel rim wheel, the tyre pressure must be n as possible. The tyre pressure must corre-
nsult the table containing the inflation pres- nger of causing an accident. Use the highest the table.
0 km/h, as higher speeds can cause an acci-
hard braking and fast cornering, as this could
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 256 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Spare steel rim wheel
The spare steel rim wheel is carried in the wheel well under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment. It is only
intended for temporary use over short distances.
Taking out the spare wheel
Turn the plastic knob fig. 192 anti-clockwise.
Take out the spare wheel.
Securing the defective wheel in the spare wheel well
Place wheel in spare wheel well in the luggage compartment.
Secure the wheel by turning plastic knob clockwise.
Replace the floor panel before closing the tailgate.
Your vehicle can be factory-eq
wheel does not usually meet t
fitted on the vehicle because o
tion, tread pattern, etc. Theref
The spare steel wheel is d
attempt to mount the wheel o
Your vehicle will have diffe
steel rim wheel is mounted
The spare wheel is only int
Replace the spare wheel with
sions as soon as possible.
If the size of the spare stee
wheels, it is unlikely that snow
WARNING
After mounting the spare checked and corrected as soo spond to the vehicle load (co sures). Otherwise there is da tyre pressure as indicated in
Do not drive faster than 8 dent.
Avoid heavy acceleration, cause an accident.
Fig. 192 Spare steel rim wheel
If and when 257
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ents when doing so.
escribed below.
er.
s page 258.
the jack page 259.
the flat tyre and then put on the spare
s firmly in diagonal sequence with the box
l
el, there are still tasks to complete.
e defective tyre in the spare wheel well
back in the luggage compartment.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 257 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Changing a wheel
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe place (e.g. behind the roadside crash barrier).
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage 1st gear.
When towing a trailer: Unhitch the trailer from your vehicle.
Take the tools and the spare wheel page 254 out of the
luggage compartment.
WARNING
If you have a puncture in heavy traffic, switch on the hazard warning lights and place the warning triangle in a visible location. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution If you have to change the tyre on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away.
Note Please observe legal requirem
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as d
Remove the wheel cov
Loosen the wheel bolt
Raise the vehicle with
Take off the wheel with
wheel page 260.
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the wheel bolt
spanner page 258.
Replace the cover.
After changing a whee
After changing the whe
Place the wheel with th
and secure it.
Put the tools and jack
If and when258
ng the wheel bolts
loosened before raising the vehicle.
ar as it will go over the wheel bolt 4).
close to the end as possible and turn the
turn anti-clockwise fig. 193 -arrow-.
ar as it will go over the wheel bolt4).
close to the end as possible and tighten
g clockwise.
ew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts* page 261.
Fig. 193 Changing the wheel: Loosen the wheel bolts
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 258 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
The inflation pressure of the newly fitted spare tyre must be
checked as soon as possible.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon
as possible with a torque wrench. It must be 120 Nm (always
when cold)
Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.
Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are rusty and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the tightening torque
checked.
For your safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt tightening
torque has been checked.
Loosening and tighteni
The wheel bolts must be
Loosening
Fit the box spanner as f
Grip the box spanner as
wheel bolts about one
Tightening
Fit the box spanner as f
Grip the box spanner as
the bolt firmly by turnin
4) An adapter is required to unscr
If and when 259
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ck under the door sill at the jacking point ing changed fig. 194 -arrows-.
the jacking point until the claw of the jack
rtical rib under the door sill.
he arm of the jack fits on the rib under the
and the movable base plate of the jack
d.
the defective wheel is just clear of the
r of the door sills mark the jacking points
only one jacking point for each wheel. Do not fit
points to the wheel arches is approximately 15
the rear.
Fig. 195 Changing the wheel: Jack
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 259 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
If the wheel bolt does not come loose, it may be possible to release it by
pushing down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the
vehicle for support and take care not to slip.
Raising the vehicle
In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with
a jack.
Position the vehicle ja
closest to the wheel be
Wind up the jack under
is directly below the ve
Align the jack so that t
door sill fig. 195
is flat on the groun
Raise the vehicle until
ground.
Recesses at the front and rea
fig. 194 -arrows-. There is
the jack anywhere else.
The distance from the jacking
cm at the front and 25 cm at
Fig. 194 Changing the wheel: Jack position points
AA
AB
If and when260
olts and raising the vehicle with the jack,
ibed below:
g the hexagonal tool in the handle of the
l) and place them on a clean surface
s and tighten them lightly using the
screwdriver handle.
an and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare
ition and hub mounting surfaces. These
fitting the wheel.
crewdriver handle makes it easier to turn the
rewdriver blade should be removed when the
n of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
ket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 260 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good support. Use
a large, stable base if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as tiles)
use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
WARNING
Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be
completed.
After loosening the wheel b
change the wheel as descr
Removing a wheel
Unscrew the bolts usin
screwdriver (vehicle too
fig. 196.
Fitting a wheel
Screw in the wheel bolt
hexagonal socket in the
The wheel bolts should be cle
wheel, inspect the wheel cond
surfaces must be clean before
The hexagonal socket in the s
wheel bolts. The reversible sc
tool is used for this purpose.
If tyres with a specific directio
rotation.
Note Do not use the hexagonal soc
tighten the wheel bolts.
Fig. 196 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts
If and when 261
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
read pattern
ead pattern must be fitted so that they
ection.
n be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
ion. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
This is important so that these tyres can give
essive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong
emely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum
rly important when driving on wet roads.
es of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
ced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 261 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go fig. 197.
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Code
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of
the adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an
Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional t
Tyres with directional tr
rotate in the correct dir
A directional tread pattern ca
point in the direction of rotat
cated when fitting the wheel.
maximum grip and avoid exc
If, in an emergency, you have
direction, you must drive extr
performance. This is particula
To benefit from the advantag
defective tyre should be repla
rotate in the correct direction
Fig. 197 Anti-theft wheel bolt
If and when262
ot be used in the following cases:
er than 4 mm fig. 198
damaged
th very low pressure or a completely flat tyre
ility system) is described in the section
and in the instructions supplied with the tyre
) can be used at outside temperatures down to
note the following points:
0 km/h.
, hard braking and fast cornering.
impaired.
aled using the Tyre Mobility System are only er a short period.
nt the tyre pressure monitoring system* may e drive carefully to the next available quali-
must NOT be used,
larger than 4 mm
en damaged
g with very low pressure or a completely flat
nce if the repair of a tyre puncture is not pound.
to come into contact with your eyes, skin or
A1
A2
A3
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 262 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Tyre repairs* (Tyre Mobility System)
General information and safety notes
Repaired tyres are only suitable for temporary use over a
short period.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
In the event of a puncture you will find the TMS, which consists of a sealing
compound and a compressor, located under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment.
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies,
provided that the cuts or punctures are no larger than approx. 4 mm in diam-
eter.
It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.
The sealing compound must n
On cuts and punctures larg
If the wheel rim has been
If you have been driving wi
How to use the TMS (tyre mob Repairing a tyre page 263
sealant can.
The TMS (tyre mobility system -20 C.
WARNING
After repairing a tyre please
Do not drive faster than 8
Avoid heavy acceleration
Vehicle handling could be
Tyres which have been se suitable for temporary use ov
After using the tyre seala malfunction. Therefore, pleas fied workshop.
The Tyre Mobility System
on cuts and punctures
if the wheel rim has be
if you have been drivin tyre
Seek professional assista possible with the sealing com
Do not allow the sealant clothing.
Fig. 198 The Tyre Mobility System is not suitable for repairing this type of damage to tyres.
If and when 263
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
r puncture, park the vehicle as far away
as possible.
irmly to prevent the vehicle from moving
.
is possible using the Tyre Mobility System
ers leave the vehicle and move away from
.
an and the compressor out of the luggage
Fig. 199 Repairing a tyre
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 263 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
If you do come into contact with the sealant immediately rinse the eyes or skin affected with clean water.
Change clothing immediately if it becomes soiled with the tyre sealant.
Make sure you do not breathe in the fumes!
If any of the tyre sealant is accidentally ingested, immediately rinse the mouth thoroughly and drink lots of water.
Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical assistance if needed.
If any allergic reactions should occur get medical help immediately.
Keep the sealant away from children.
For the sake of the environment If you have to dispose of a sealant can, go to a specialised waste service or to
a SEAT Technical Service, where the product can be recycled in an appropriate
waste container.
Note If sealant should leak out, leave it to dry. When it has dried, you can pull
it off like a piece of foil.
Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the
sealing compound exchanged by a qualified workshop.
Repairing a tyre
Preparations
If you have a flat tyre o
from the flow of traffic
Apply the handbrake f
accidentally on slopes
Engage 1st gear.
Check whether a repair
page 262.
Ensure that all passeng
the danger area
Take the tyre sealant c compartment.
WARNING (continued)
If and when264
ins lower than the value specified above
x. 10 metres forwards or backwards, so
read evenly in the tyre. If the pressure is
cification the tyre is too badly damaged
using the tyre sealant.
, stop to check the tyre pressure.
han 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly
on! You should obtain professional
heavy traffic, switch on the hazard warning triangle in a visible location. This is for your her road users.
rs wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
facturer's safety notes on the compressor and h the tyre sealant can.
ld up a tyre pressure of 2.0 bar within 6 tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive on!
nce if the repair of a tyre puncture is not pound.
n 1.3 bar after driving about 10 minutes, the o not drive on! Obtain technical assistance.
o repair a tyre on a slope.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 264 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Stick the max. 80 km/h adhesive, which is included with the
tyre sealant can, onto the instrument panel where the driver will
see it.
Filling the tyre
Shake the tyre sealant can well.
Screw the enclosed filling hose onto the sealant can as far as it
will go. This will automatically pierce the foil sealing the can.
Take the valve cap off the tyre valve and use the enclosed valve
insert tool to unscrew the valve insert page 263, fig. 199.
Place the valve insert onto a clean surface.
Remove the sealing plug from the filling hose and insert the hose
into the tyre valve.
Hold the tyre sealant can upside down and fill the complete
contents of the can into the tyre.
Then disconnect the hose and screw the valve insert firmly back
into the tyre valve.
Inflating the tyre
Screw the compressor filling hose onto the tyre valve and plug
the connector into the cigarette lighter.
Pump the tyre up to 2.0 to 2.5 bar and monitor the pressure
shown on the pressure gauge.
If the tyre pressure rema
drive the vehicle appro
that the sealant can sp
still lower than the spe
and cannot be repaired
Final check
After about 10 minutes
If tyre pressure is less t
damaged. Do not drive
assistance.
WARNING
If you have a puncture in lights and place the warning own safety and also warns ot
Make sure your passenge roadside crash barrier).
Please observe the manu the instructions supplied wit
If it is not possible to bui minutes this means that the
Seek professional assista possible with the sealing com
If tyre pressure is less tha tyre is too badly damaged. D
Caution Take special care if you have t
If and when 265
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
and its failed electrical component.
using a screwdriver fig. 200.
ponding to the damaged electric
, Fuse assignment.
m inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
e fuse out.
e (which will have a melted metal strip)
same amp rating.
on.
its are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
d end of the dash panel.
identifying the fuses are provided on the inside
o a crank handle for operating the sunroof* by
fails).
Fig. 201 Schematic drawing of fuse box at the left-hand end of dash panel: Fuses (without fuse cover)
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 265 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note Do not use the compressor for longer than 6 minutes. Otherwise, it might
overheat. When the compressor has cooled down, you can use it again.
If tyre sealant should leak out, leave it to dry and then pull it off like foil.
After carrying out a tyre repair remember to buy a new tyre sealant can at
a qualified workshop. This will ensure that the Tyre Mobility System is opera-
tive again.
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Fuses
Changing fuses
If a fuse has blown, it must be replaced.
Switch off the ignition
Remove the fuse cover
Identify the fuse corres
consumer page 266
Take the plastic clip fro
blown fuse, and pull th
Replace the blown fus
with a new fuse of the
Fit the fuse cover back
The individual electrical circu
behind a cover at the left-han
Two spare fuses and a sticker
of the fuse cover. There is als
hand (if the electrical system
Fig. 200 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover
If and when266
ion of the front passenger air- 5
10
10
10
10
rain/light sensor 10
ft 5
senger door 15
15
r convenience equipment 20
30
30
r (control unit) 30
ump for diesel 20
20
automatic anti-dazzle interior
utomatic gearbox 15
15
Amps
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 266 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Caution Never repair damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a
higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. It could also cause
damage to other parts of the electrical system.
Note If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical system
must be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Fuse assignment
This list shows the fuses which can be replaced relatively
easily by the owner.
No. Consumer Amps
1 Air conditioner 10
2 Footwell lamps 5
3 Heated washer jets 5
4 Radiator fan 5
5 Parking aid, automatic gearbox 10
6 Air conditioner (air purity sensor), pressure sensor 5
7 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP), brake light
switch, clutch pedal switch, steering angle sensor 10
8 Telephone 5
9 Vacant
10 Adaptive headlights right 5
11 Airbag and disconnect
bag
12 Diagnostic socket
13 Steering column unit
14 Brake lights
15 Instrument panel
16 Vacant
17 Tyre pressure control,
18 Adaptive headlights le
19 Vacant
20 Vacant
21 Vacant
22 Driver door / front pas
23 Rear doors
24 Central electrics unit fo
25 Heater blower
26 Rear window heater
27 Power socket for traile
28 Fuel pump, auxiliary p
29 Vacant
30 Sliding/tilting sunroof
31 Diagnosis connection,
mirror, reverse light, a
32 Towing socket
No. Consumer
If and when 267
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
bulbs for exterior lights yourself:
s (except xenon headlights)
be changed by a qualified workshop:
bulb page 274
in degree of practical skill to change defective
ar to those bulbs which are only accessible from
at you have defective bulbs changed by a qual-
echanic.
lbs in the engine compartment yourself, be
lved page 229 in Types of bulbs.
alogen headlights
with a bulb of the same type. The name can be
holder.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 267 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
The electric windows and electric seat adjusters are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automatically after a few seconds when the overload
(caused for example by frozen windows) has been corrected.
Note Please note that the above list contains all data at the time of going to press,
so it is subject to modifications. If discrepancies should occur, please refer to
the sticker on the inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your
model.
Bulbs
General information
You can change the following
Main headlights: all bulb
Tail lights: all bulbs
Side turn signal bulb
The following bulbs can only
Main headlights: Xenon*
Front fog light bulbs
As a rule, you require a certa
bulbs. This applies in particul
the engine compartment.
If in doubt, we recommend th
ified workshop or qualified m
If you do decide to change bu
aware of the safety risks invo
Changing bulbs. H
Types of bulbs
You must only replace a bulb
found on the base of the bulb
33 Lighter 20
34 Lambda probe heater 5
35 Luggage compartment power socket* 20
36 Wiper system 30
37 Pump for windscreen washer and headlight washer
system 30
38 Luggage compartment illumination, alarm 15
39 Radio, amplifier 20
40 Horn 25
41 230 volt socket 30
42 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) 25
43 Engine management 15
44 Seat heating 35
No. Consumer Amps
If and when268
of the lighting system. By switching on the
the beam of light is projected will quickly be
may continue to be misted.
ervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
ctioning properly. This is not only in the interest
that of all other road users.
ake sure you have the correct new bulb.
t of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth
ise, the fingerprints left on the glass will
t generated by the bulb, be deposited on the
.
moved to gain access to the bulbs for
.
Fig. 202 Air duct on right side of vehicle
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 268 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
WARNING
Take particular care when working on components in the engine compartment if the engine is warm - risk of burns!
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.
The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing.
Caution Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. If not, a
short circuit could occur.
Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.
For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper
manner.
Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has
no influence on the useful life
lights, the area through which
demisted. However, the edges
Please check at regular int
lighting) on your vehicle is fun
of your own safety, but also in
Before changing a bulb, m
Do not touch the glass par
or paper towel instead. Otherw
vaporise as a result of the hea
reflector and impair its surface
Removing the air duct
The air duct has to be re
the right-side headlight
Bulb Type
Dipped beam headlights (halogen) 12 V/55 W (H7 LL)
Main beam headlights 12 V/55 W (H1)
Turn signal 12 V/21 W (PY21W)
Side lights 12 V/5 W (W5W LL)
If and when 269
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
s
Fig. 204 Halogen bulbs
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 269 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Unscrew bolts page 268, fig. 202.
Detach air duct from guide and take it out.
Fitting the air duct
Once the bulb(s) for the right-side headlight have been
changed, the air duct must be re-installed.
Place the air duct in the correct position.
First turn the two screws in lightly, then tighten both screws.
Push the air duct into guide .
Halogen headlight bulb
Main beam headlights
Side lights
Dipped beam headlights
Side lights
Turn signal
AA
AB
Fig. 203 Air duct on right side of vehicle
AA
AB
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
If and when270
reviously remove the rigid cover page 272,
bulb changes.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 270 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Changing the turn signal bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides.
Switch off the ignition and the lights.
Raise the bonnet.
Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise, pulling it by the grip
fig. 205 and removing the bulb holder and the bulb.
Replace the blown bulb in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-
clockwise to remove) with a new bulb (press and turn clockwise
to insert).
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Note Although it is not necessary, p
fig. 208 for easier turn signal
Fig. 205 Turn signal
If and when 271
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
and the lights.
over fig. 206 to remove it.
fig. 207 from the bulb.
. 207 inwards and to the right.
ng it from the connection terminal and
nt so that it sits correctly in the cut-out on
correct lighting, the filament must be
g the bulb, you can check the position of
eadlight glass.
e order, ensuring that the rubber cover is
ng.
bulb is working.
ttings checked as soon as possible.
AA
A1
A2
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 271 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Changing the main headlight bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides.
Switch off the ignition
Raise the bonnet.
Pull up on the rubber c
Remove the connector
Press the spring fig
Remove the bulb. pulli
fitting fit the replaceme
the reflector. To ensure
vertical. When changin
the bulb through the h
Installation is in revers
well fitted to the housi
Check whether the new
Have the headlight se
Fig. 206 Main beam headlights
Fig. 207 Main beam headlights
If and when272
nd the lights.
08 in the direction of the arrow and
separating the brace side and then
from the other end of the cover.
g. 209 from the bulb.
g fig. 209 pressing inwards to the
the new one in the headlight casing with
g to position it from below.
ng it and pressing it slightly while turning
ure correct lighting, the filament must be
g the bulb, you can check the position of
adlight glass.
to the bulb.
ing the side tabs and then closing the
ake sure that the gasket sits well on the
operation.
bulb is working.
ings checked as soon as possible.
A1
A2
A3
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 272 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Changing the dipped beam headlight bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides.
Switch off the ignition a
Raise the bonnet.
Move the brace fig. 2
remove the rigid cover,
removing the two tabs
Pull the connector fi
Unclip the retainer sprin
right.
Remove the bulb and fit
the tab upwards, startin
Clip on the spring, raisi
it anti-clockwise. To ens
vertical. When changin
the bulb through the he
Connect the connector
Fit the cover, first insert
cover and the brace. M
casing cover during the
Check whether the new
Have the headlight sett
Fig. 208 Dipped beam headlights
Fig. 209 Dipped beam headlights
If and when 273
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
and the lights.
210 in the direction of the arrow and
, separating the brace side and then
from the other end of the cover.
lb holder tabs fig. 211 and pull the
lso be removed by pulling on the bulb
the bulb holder by pulling both pieces
ssing on the bulb holder.
socket and press on the bulb holder. Fit
g the side tabs and then closing the cover
ure that the gasket sits well on the casing
tion.
bulb is working.
A1
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 273 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Changing the side light bulb (outside of vehicle)
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides.
Switch off the ignition
Raise the bonnet.
Move the brace fig.
remove the rigid cover
removing the two tabs
Gently press on the bu
cover upwards (it can a
holder wires).
Separate the bulb from
anti-clockwise.
Fit the new bulb by pre
Insert the bulb into the
the cover, first insertin
and the brace. Make s
cover during the opera
Check whether the new
Fig. 210 Side light bulb (outside of vehicle)
Fig. 211 Side light bulb (outside of vehicle)
If and when274
nd the lights.
12 in the direction of the arrow and
separating the brace side and then
from the other end of the cover.
e bulb holder by pulling on the bulb
the bulb holder by pulling both pieces
sing on the bulb holder.
socket so that the side of the bulb holder
3 and press on it.
ing the side tabs and then closing the
ake sure that the gasket sits well on the
operation.
bulb is working.
i-Xenon AFS headlights
ith a bulb of the same type. The name can be
holder.
A1
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 274 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Changing the side light bulb (inside of vehicle)
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides.
Switch off the ignition a
Raise the bonnet.
Move the brace fig. 2
remove the rigid cover,
removing the two tabs
Remove the bulb and th
holder wiring.
Separate the bulb from
anti-clockwise.
Fit the new bulb by pres
Insert the bulb into the
grip is vertical fig. 21
Fit the cover, first insert
cover and the brace. M
casing cover during the
Check whether the new
Changing bulbs. B
Types of bulbs
You must only replace a bulb w
found on the base of the bulb
Fig. 212 Side light bulb (inside of vehicle)
Fig. 213 Side lights. Bulb holder grip in vertical position
If and when 275
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
e of the lighting system. By switching on the
h the beam of light is projected will quickly be
s may continue to be misted.
tervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
ctioning properly. This is not only in the interest
n that of all other road users.
ake sure you have the correct new bulb.
rt of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth
rwise, the fingerprints left on the glass will
at generated by the bulb, be deposited on the
e.
moved to gain access to the bulbs for
t.
Fig. 214 Air duct on right side of vehicle
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 275 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
Take particular care when working on components in the engine compartment if the engine is warm - risk of burns!
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.
The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing.
Caution Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. If not, a
short circuit could occur.
Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.
For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper
manner.
Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has
no influence on the useful lif
lights, the area through whic
demisted. However, the edge
Please check at regular in
lighting) on your vehicle is fun
of your own safety, but also i
Before changing a bulb, m
Do not touch the glass pa
or paper towel instead. Othe
vaporise as a result of the he
reflector and impair its surfac
Removing the air duct
The air duct has to be re
the right-side headligh
Bulb Type
Xenon bulbs 12 V/35 W (D1S)
DRL (day light) 12 V/21 W (P21W SLL)
Turn signal 12 V/21 W (PY21W)
Side lights 12 V/5 W (W5W blue LL)
If and when276
bulbs
beam/main beam)
Fig. 216 Bi-Xenon AFS headlight bulbs
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 276 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Unscrew bolts page 275, fig. 214.
Detach air duct from guide and take it out.
Fitting the air duct
Once the bulb(s) for the right-side headlight have been
changed, the air duct must be re-installed.
Place the air duct in the correct position.
First turn the two screws in lightly, then tighten both screws.
Push the air duct into guide .
Bi-Xenon AFS headlight
Turn signal
Xenon headlight (dipped
Side lights
DRL light
AA
AB
Fig. 215 Air duct on right side of vehicle
AA
AB
AA
AB
AC
AD
If and when 277
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
previously remove the rigid cover page 279,
ulb changes.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 277 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Changing the DRL light bulb (daytime running light)
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides.
Switch off the ignition and the lights.
Raise the bonnet.
Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise, pulling it by the grip
fig. 217 and removing the bulb holder and the bulb.
Replace the blown bulb in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-
clockwise to remove) with a new bulb (press and turn clockwise
to insert).
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Note Although it is not necessary,
fig. 220 for easier day light b
Fig. 217 DRL light
If and when278
nd the lights.
ig. 218 to remove it.
r by pulling on the grip and turning it anti-
in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-
ith a new bulb (press and turn clockwise
to the socket with the tab facing upwards
. Press it against the socket and turn
ing the bulb, you can check the position
headlight glass.
ghten, making sure it fit properly into the
bulb is working.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 278 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Changing the turn signal bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides.
Switch off the ignition a
Raise the bonnet.
Pull the rubber cap f
Remove the bulb holde
clockwise fig. 219.
Replace the blown bulb
clockwise to remove) w
to insert).
Insert the bulb holder in
and the grip horizontal
clockwise. When chang
of the bulb through the
Fit the rubber cap and ti
headlight casing.
Check whether the new
Fig. 218 Turn signal
Fig. 219 Turn signal
If and when 279
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
and the lights.
220 in the direction of the arrow and
, separating the brace side and then
from the other end of the cover.
r by pulling on the grip fig. 221 (it can
lling on the bulb holder wires).
the bulb holder by pulling both pieces
ssing on the bulb holder.
socket and press on the bulb holder grip.
ting the side tabs and then closing the
ake sure that the gasket sits well on the
e operation.
bulb is working.
lb
he bulb is the same on both sides.
changed at a qualified workshop.
A1
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 279 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Changing the side light bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides.
Switch off the ignition
Raise the bonnet.
Move the brace fig.
remove the rigid cover
removing the two tabs
Remove the bulb holde
also be removed by pu
Separate the bulb from
anti-clockwise.
Fit the new bulb by pre
Insert the bulb into the
Fit the cover, first inser
cover and the brace. M
casing cover during th
Check whether the new
Changing the xenon bu
The procedure for changing t
WARNING
This type of bulb should be
Fig. 220 Side light
Fig. 221 Side light
If and when280
LED lamps
s
e the turn signal light.
brake light or side light (LED lamp) lights up,
be replaced.
nly shown when the LED function goes out
will stop working, without displaying the
ues to operate.
Fig. 223 Overview of tail lights
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 280 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Changing tail light bulbs (on side panel)
Overview of tail lights
Tail lights on side panel
Brake lights and side lights
Turn signal
Overview of tail lights.
Tail lights on side panel
Brake lights and side light
Turn signal
Note It is only possible to chang
If the warning lamp for the
the tail light assembly should
The failure of the lamp is o
completely. Sometimes, a LED
warning as the function contin
Fig. 222 Overview of tail lights
If and when 281
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
is used to secure and guide the tail light.
lbs is defective.
ut of the vehicle's tool kit page 254.
of the reversible screwdriver insert.
a screwdriver in the slot fig. 224
with the retaining clips) from the opening.
rew located behind the cover with the
anti-clockwise (arrows) .
light out of the housing ( fig. 225 posi-
ulling alternately in positions and .
r page 282.
he tail light, take care not to cause any damage.
particular can lead to the paintwork or tail light
nother reason why we recommend having the
workshop.
th ready to place under the glass on the tail
A1
A2
A1 A2
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 281 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Removing the tail light
To change the bulbs you must remove the tail light assembly.
Removing the light requires a certain degree of practical skill.
A special retaining screw
Check which of the bu
Open the tailgate.
Take the screwdriver o
Use the flat-blade side
Prise off the cover with
and remove the cover (
Carefully loosen the sc
screwdriver, turning it
Gradually ease the tail
tions and ) by p
Remove the bulb holde
Caution When removing or installing t
Removing the tail light in
becoming damaged. This is a
bulbs changed by a qualified
Note Make sure you have a soft clo
light, to avoid any scratches.
Fig. 224 Luggage compartment: Location of the bolt securing the tail light unit
Fig. 225 Removing tail light from side panel
A3 A4
If and when282
d easily in the bulb holder.
a bayonet fastener. The table below
ulb positions.
ive bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it
t.
ng it into the bulb holder and turn it to the
ny fingerprints from the glass part of the
bulb is working.
er page 283.
Fig. 227 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder: Example: Outer left tail light
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 282 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Remove the bulb holder
When changing a bulb, you must first remove the bulb holder.
There are four securing tabs on the inside of the tail light unit.
Release the retaining tabs fig. 226.
Lift out the bulb holder in the direction of the arrow .
Change the defective bulb page 282 page 283.
WARNING
If a bulb is replaced in a tail light assembly with LED, do not pull too hard on the bulb holder to avoid damaging the wiring of the LED module.
Changing bulbs
All bulbs can be change
The bulbs are secured with
gives an overview of the b
Lightly press the defect
to the left and remove i
Fit the new bulb, pressi
right as far as it will go.
Use a cloth to remove a
bulb.
Check whether the new
Re-install the bulb hold
Fig. 226 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light
AA
AB
If and when 283
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the
.
any fingerprints from the glass part of the
bulb is working.
der page 283.
to fit.
ulb function
urn signal
Fig. 229 Securing the bulb holder in the tail light unit
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 283 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Position of the bulbs
Changing bulbs. LED lamps
All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.
The bulb is secured with a bayonet fastening. The table below gives
an overview of the bulb positions.
Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it
to the left and remove it.
Fit the new bulb, press
right as far as it will go
Use a cloth to remove
bulb.
Check whether the new
Re-install the bulb hol
Position of the bulbs
Fitting the bulb holder
The bulb holder is easy
Pos. page 282,
fig. 227
Bulb function
A Turn signal
B Brake lights and side lights
Fig. 228 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder: Example: Outer left tail light
Pos. fig. 228 B
A T
If and when284
unit in fig. 230 arrow in the
ht unit against the housing, first in posi-
ition , until that the clips engage firmly
s.
o the front side of the tail light unit and
driver, from the luggage compartment
t sideways to ensure it is correctly fitted.
the screw, with the notch pointing to the
k into the tool kit.
s for the tail lights are working.
Fig. 231 Luggage compartment: Location of the bolt securing the tail light unit
A1
A3
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 284 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Check that the seal is seated correctly on the bulb holder.
Position the bulb holder on the tail light and align it so that it is
securely seated.
Press the bulb holder into the tail light until it engages.
Check that all four retaining tabs page 283, fig. 229 -arrows-
have engaged.
Re-install the tail light unit page 284.
Fitting the tail light unit
The tail light unit is easy to fit. First place the tail light
housing.
Gently press the tail lig
tion and then in pos
in the rubber mounting
Apply gentle pressure t
secure using the screw
fig. 231 .
Try to move the tail ligh
Fit the cover back onto
rear .
Put the screwdriver bac
Make sure that all bulb
Fig. 230 Fitting the tail light unit
A2
A1
A2
If and when 285
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
LED lamps
ce the rear fog lamp and the reversing light.
e side light (LED lamp) lights up, the tail light
.
only shown when the LED function goes out
D will stop working, without displaying the
inues to operate.
Fig. 233 Overview of tail lights
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 285 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Caution Take care when fitting the tail light unit to make sure there is no damage to
the paintwork or any of its components.
Changing tail light bulbs (on tailgate)
Overview of tail lights
Tail lights on the tailgate
Rear side lights
Rear fog light
Reverse lights
Overview of tail lights.
Tail lights on the tailgate
Rear side lights
Rear fog light
Reverse lights
Note It is only possible to repla
If the warning lamp for th
assembly should be replaced
The failure of the lamp is
completely. Sometimes, a LE
warning as the function cont
Fig. 232 Overview of tail lights
If and when286
lder for the inner tail lights via the inside
s is defective.
t of the vehicle's tool kit page 254.
nto the opening in the cover fig. 234
r .
fig. 235 in the direction of the arrows
lder by pulling in the direction of the
ge 287 page 287.
ight assembly with LED, do not pull too hard amaging the wiring of the LED module.
A2
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 286 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Remove the bulb holder
The tailgate must be open to change the bulbs.
You can access the bulb ho
of the tailgate.
Check which of the bulb
Take the screwdriver ou
Insert the screwdriver i
and detach the cove
Press on the tabs and remove the bulb ho
arrow .
Change the bulbs pa
WARNING
If a bulb is replaced in a tail l on the bulb holder to avoid d
Fig. 234 Remove the cover of the tailgate trim
Fig. 235 Remove the bulb holder
A1
AA
AB
If and when 287
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
mps
ed easily in the bulb holder.
h a bayonet fastener. The table below
ulb positions.
tive bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it
it.
ulb function
everse lights
ear side lights
ear fog light
Fig. 237 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder. Example: Tail lights on the tailgate
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 287 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Changing bulbs
All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.
The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below
gives an overview of the bulb positions.
Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it
to the left and remove it.
Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the
right as far as it will go.
Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the
bulb.
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Re-install the bulb holder page 288.
Position of the bulbs
Changing bulbs. LED la
All bulbs can be chang
The bulbs are secured wit
gives an overview of the b
Lightly press the defec
to the left and remove
Fig. 236 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder. Example: Tail lights on the tailgate
Pos. fig. 236 B
A R
B R
C R
If and when288
the left or to the right to remove the bulb.
r from the turn signal.
bulb and replace with a new bulb.
n the turn signal guide until it clicks into
al in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
ow .
n by the arrow fig. 238.
Fig. 238 Side turn signal
A1
A2
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 288 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the
right as far as it will go.
Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the
bulb.
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Re-install the bulb holder page 288.
Position of the bulbs
Fitting the bulb holder
The bulb holder is easy to fit.
Position the bulb holder on the tail light and align it so that it is
securely seated.
Press the bulb holder into the tail light until it engages.
Fit the cover back in the interior trim so that it engages.
Put the screwdriver back into the tool kit.
Make sure that all bulbs for the tail lights are working.
Side turn signals
Press the turn signal to
Remove the bulb holde
Remove the failed glass
Insert the bulb holder i
place.
First place the turn sign
the tabs fig. 238, arr
Insert the bulb as show
Pos. page 287,
fig. 236
Bulb function
A Reverse lights
B Rear fog light
If and when 289
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
cover and remove the bulb from the
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 289 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Luggage compartment lights
Remove the tulip-shaped fitting by pressing on its inside edge
using the flat side of a screwdriver.
Remove the protective
housing.
Fig. 239 Luggage compartment light
Fig. 240 Luggage compartment light
If and when290
ng it in the direction of the arrow and
he reverse order.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 290 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Registration light
To remove the light cover, unscrew the bolts fig. 241.
Remove the bulb, movi
outwards fig. 242.
Installation is done in t
Fig. 241 Number plate light
Fig. 242 Number plate light
If and when 291
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
move the protective cover.
ing it in the direction of the arrow and
ve a sufficient wire cross section.
ause of a discharged battery, the battery can be
nother vehicle to start the engine.
standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's docu-
ction must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines
l engines.
ch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
s are connected.
ust be properly connected to the vehicle elec-
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 291 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Sun visor light
Remove the bulb carefully, using the screwdriver on its flat side
fig. 243.
Use a screwdriver to re
Remove the bulb, mov
outwards fig. 244.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must ha
If the engine fails to start bec
connected to the battery of a
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with
mentation). The wire cross se
and at least 35 mm2 for diese
Note The vehicles must not tou
soon as the positive terminal
The discharged battery m
trical system.
Fig. 243 Removing sun visor light
Fig. 244 Removing sun visor light
If and when292
f the black jump lead to a solid metal
lted on to the engine block, or onto the
e vehicle with the flat battery. Do not
ar the battery .
ch a way that they cannot come into
g parts in the engine compartment.
vehicle with the boosting battery and let
vehicle with the flat battery and wait one
engine is running.
jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
er and heated rear window in the vehicle
s helps minimise voltage peaks which are
ds are disconnected.
ning, disconnect the leads in reverse
n above.
they have good metal-to-metal contact with
tch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
nute.
AX
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 292 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
How to jump start: description
On fig. 245 shows the flat battery and the charged battery.
Jump lead terminal connections
Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .
1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 245
terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .
2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive
terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.
4. Connect the other end o
component which is bo
engine block itself of th
connect it to a point ne
5. Position the leads in su
contact with any movin
Starting
6. Start the engine of the
it run at idling speed.
7. Start the engine of the
or two minutes until the
Removing the jump leads
8. Before you remove the
they are switched on).
9. Turn on the heater blow
with the flat battery. Thi
generated when the lea
10. When the engine is run
order to the details give
Connect the battery clamps so
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, swi
try again after about half a mi
Fig. 245 How to connect the jump leads
AA AB
A+
A+
A-
If and when 293
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 293 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 229.
The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.
Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.
The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
If and when294
ng points if you use a tow-rope:
towing vehicle
il the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
s cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
e gently.
ke servo and power steering are not
ou are towing. Brake earlier than you
h a more gentle pressure on the brake.
towed vehicle
e remains taut at all times when towing.
ehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-bar.
elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
e made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
nce, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
pt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 294 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable page 291.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
Keep the clutch pressed down.
Switch the ignition on.
Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
General notes
Please observe the followi
Notes for the driver of the
Drive slowly at first unt
gradually.
Begin and change gear
matic vehicle, accelerat
Remember that the bra
working in the vehicle y
would normally, but wit
Notes for the driver of the
Ensure that the tow-rop
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a v
tow-rope if you do not have a
A tow-rope should be slightly
It is advisable to use a tow-rop
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the tow
towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experie
drivers should be familiar with
enced drivers should not attem
If and when 295
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ed when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
ith the front wheels raised. Towing should be
son.
ays be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the
rting.
om the on-board tool set.
r by pressing down on the right hand side.
to the left, in the direction of the arrow
Fig. 246 Fitting the towing eye to front rear of the vehicle
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 295 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply
considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you
will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
Put the selector lever into position N.
Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.
Do not tow further than 50 km.
If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels should
be raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified
person.
The steering wheel is lock
vehicle must then be towed w
carried out by a qualified per
The towing eye should alw
notes page 294, Tow-sta
Front towing eye
Fitting the towing eye
Take the towing ring fr
Remove the front cove
Bolt the eye to its limit
fig. 246.
If and when296
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 296 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Rear towing eye
There is a towing eye at the rear on the right below the rear bumper.
Description of specifications 297
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
used in the Technical Specifications section
Meaning
Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine
power.
Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.
Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.
Carbon dioxide
Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.
Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance
of petrol.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 297 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Technical Specifications
Description of specifications
Important information
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation always has
precedence.
All technical specifications provided in this manual are valid for the standard
model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Maintenance
Programme or the vehicle registration documents shows which engine is
installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,
for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations
Abbrevia- tion
kW
PS
rpm
Nm
l/100 km
g/km
CO2
CN
RON
Description of specifications298
he inside of the spare wheel recess in the
rovided on the vehicle data sticker: fig. 247.
in the Maintenance Programme.
r
ber (chassis number)
ne power output
letters
ior trim code
s
ided in the Maintenance Programme.
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) urban
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) motorway
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) mixed
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 298 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Vehicle identification data
The most important information is given on the identification
plate and the vehicle data sticker.
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.
Identification plate
The identification plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compart-
ment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on t
luggage compartment.
The following information is p
These data are also provided
Production control numbe
Vehicle identification num
Model code number
Model designation / engi
Engine and gearbox code
Paintwork number / inter
Optional equipment code
Consumption values
CO2 emissions values
Data from 2 to 9 are also prov
Consumption figures and CO2
Consumption (litres/100
Consumption (litres/100
Consumption (litres/100
Fig. 247 Vehicle data sticker (luggage compart- ment)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
Description of specifications 299
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- eed and driving style to suit road conditions
xle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight ad or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the
vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.
ar loads approved are selected in intensive
efined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
r maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain
h). The figures may be different in other coun-
ehicle documents take precedence over these
bar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket
we recommend that you always tow
rawbar load. The response of the trailer on the
ar load is too small.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 299 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Information on fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle
data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the
vehicle data sticker.
The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle
weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox
combination and the equipment fitted.
The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the
tests indicated in regulations 715/2007/EC and 692/2008/EC.
Note Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on
personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the
vehicle condition.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase .
WARNING
Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Always adjust your sp and requirements.
Never exceed the gross a rating. If the allowed axle lo driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weight
The trailer weights and drawb
trials according to precisely d
valid for vehicles in the EU fo
circumstances up to 100 km/
tries. All data in the official v
data .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted draw
must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety,
approaching the maximum d
road will be poor if the drawb
Description of specifications300
t least once per month. Checking the tyre the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there idents, particularly at high speeds.
bolts is too low, they could loosen while the ccident! If the tightening torque is too high,
can be damaged.
our Authorised Service Centre for information
and snow chain size.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 300 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a
wheelbase of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a
legal stipulation for a drawbar load.
WARNING
For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The slightly
raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.
Consult the chapter wheels of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure a pressure is very important. If is an increased danger of acc
If the torque of the wheel vehicle is in motion. Risk of a the wheel bolts and threads
Note We recommend that you ask y
about appropriate wheel, tyre
Technical Specifications 301
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ttery
filler cap
reservoir
dipstick
pansion tank
n washer fluid container
fluid reservoir for power steering
nd refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components
ve. These operations are described in the page 229.
rther explanations, instructions and restrictions on the tech-
ions as of page 297.
arts may vary depending on the engine.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 301 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Technical Specifications
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,
otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
Fig. 248 Diagram for the location of the various elements
Vehicle ba
Engine oil
Brake fluid
Engine oil
Coolant ex
Windscree
Hydraulic
The checking a
mentioned abo
Overview
You will find fu
nical specificat
Note The layout of p
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
Technical Specifications302
91 RONb)
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 302 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Petrol engine 1.8 88 kW (120 PS)
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 88 (120) / 3650-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 230 / 1500-3650
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1798
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal
a) Research- Octane- Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.
Maximum speed in km/h 196
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11.1
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2040
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1555
Gross front axle weight in kg 1075
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1090
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300
Technical Specifications 303
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
91 RONb)
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 303 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS)
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 118 (160) / 4500-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250 / 1500-4500
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1798
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Super
a) Research- Octane- Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.
Maximum speed in km/h 218
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8.9
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2040
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1555
Gross front axle weight in kg 1075
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1090
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Specifications304
5 RONb)
Automatic
230
5.4
7.6
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 304 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 147 kW (200 PS)
Engine specifications
Performance
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1600
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 147 (200) / 5100-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280 / 1800-5000
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1984
Fuel Super 98 RONa)/Super 9
a) Research- Octane- Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.
Manual
Maximum speed in km/h 235
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7.6
Technical Specifications 305
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
Automatic
2075
1590
1115
1090
75
Automatic
750
1700
1500
b)
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 305 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (210 PS)
Engine specifications
Manual
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2050
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1565
Gross front axle weight in kg 1090
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1090
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Manual
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1600
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 155 (210) / 4600-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320 / 1500-4600
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1984
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Super 91 RON
a) Research- Octane- Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.
Technical Specifications306
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 306 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 239
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5.4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7.3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2050
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1565
Gross front axle weight in kg 1090
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1135
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1700
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1500
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
Technical Specifications 307
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 307 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 88 kW (120 PS)
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 88 (120) / 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 290 / 1750-2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane- Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Maximum speed in km/h 196
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10.9
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2050
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1565
Gross front axle weight in kg 1100
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1105
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300
Technical Specifications308
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 308 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS)
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 105 (143) / 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320 / 1750-2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane- Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Maximum speed in km/h 209
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9.6
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2050
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1565
Gross front axle weight in kg 1100
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1105
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Specifications 309
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 309 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS)
Engine specifications
Performance
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1800
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1600
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 125 (170) / 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350 / 1750-2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane- Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Maximum speed in km/h 224
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8.6
Technical Specifications310
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 310 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2075
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1590
Gross front axle weight in kg 1115
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1135
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1800
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1600
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Technical Specifications 311
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
772 mm
ars
3a) mm
Rear
1523 mm
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 311 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Length, width 4661-4741a) mm/ 1
a) With towing eye.
Height at kerb weight 1454 mm with roof b
Front and rear projection 976 mm/ 1048-112
Wheelbase 2642 mm
Turning circle 11.2 m
Track widthb)
b) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front
1522 mm
Capacities
Fuel tank 70 l. Reserve 10 l.
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 4.8 l.
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 312 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Index 313
omatic gearbox
Dynamic gear control programme . . . . . . . 188
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Paddle levers (tiptronic mode) . . . . . . . . . . 190
Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . 173
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Steering wheel with paddle levers . . . . . . . 190
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 189
omatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
iliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
tery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Long periods of non-use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241, 242
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241, 242
cle rack
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
iesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 313 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Index
230 V socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
A Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Air conditioner
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Air purity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Air recirculation (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
ECON Mode (economy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Economical use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Solar-powered blower/sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 171
Temperature selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Air duct
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 276
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 275
Air purity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Airbag
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Anti-lock brake system
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Armrest
Storage compartment in front armrest . . . . 142
Armrests
Adjusting the front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Ashtray
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Athermic windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Aut
Aut
Aux
B Bat
Bicy
Biod
Biod
Index314
rette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
ning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
ning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
ning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
ning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
ning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
k, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
verview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
partments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
the door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
the front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
ant
hecking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ant fluid
ntifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
oolant fluid additive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
opping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
ing system
oolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
alfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ct adjustment of front seat head restraints . .
13
ct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14
ct sitting position
ront passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
e control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 314 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Brake light
Failure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Brake system
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Bulb change
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
C Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
CD-ROM player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Sunroof: opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . 113
Central locking system
Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Locking and unlocking the vehicle from inside
100
Opening and closing the windows . . . . . . 111
Security central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Switch on the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Changing the main headlight bulb
Main headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Changing the main headlight bulbs
Dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Changing the tail lights
Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 238
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child safety seat
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child seats
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Childproof lock
Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Ciga
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Cloc
Cloth
Coat
Cock
O
Com
In
In
Cool
C
Cool
A
C
T
Cool
C
M
Corre
Corre
In
Corre
F
In
Cruis
Index 315
er messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
er seat
Activating stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
With memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
er seat
Assigning the key to the seat . . . . . . . . . . . 140
ing
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Economically / Environmentally friendly . . 199
ing abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
See Dynamic gear control programme . . . . 188
amic gear control programme . . . . . . . . . . 188
nomical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
tric socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
tric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Possible malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Switch on front passenger's door . . . . . . . 110
Switches in the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
tronic differential lock
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 315 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adjust the stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Setting the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Data entry control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Date display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Deactivating front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Deactivating the airbag
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
DIS
Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Driving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Instantaneous fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . 85
Disposal
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Distance covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 85
Door and tailgate warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Doors
Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Locking the doors manually if the central lock-
ing fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Driver
See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
CD and radio display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Door and tailgate warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Handbrake warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Red symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Yellow symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Driv
Driv
driv
Driv
Driv
Driv
DRP
Dyn
E Eco
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Index316
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
ral overview of the engine compartment 301
e compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
rd warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
restraint
ear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
restraints
ront seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
ear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
emoving and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
aulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
lights
daptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
utomatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . 117
utomatic headlight control photosensors 117
oming home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ront fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
eadlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 316 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Electronic Stability Programme
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Emergencies
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Disconnecting the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 259
Sunroof emergency activation . . . . . . . . . . 114
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Engine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Engine compartment
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Oil pressure too low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Oil sensor defective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Engine speed governing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Roof racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 199
ESP
See Electronic Stability Programme . . . . . . 172
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
F Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fuel level low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Instantaneous fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . 85
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fuel tank
opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fuse
Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
G Gear
Gear
Gene
Glov
L
GRA
H Hand
Haza
Head
R
Head
F
R
R
Head
D
F
Head
A
A
A
C
D
F
H
Index 317
Reverse lights faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Xenon lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
d compartment in the luggage compartment
See Loading the luggage compartment . . . . 16
ding the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 16
king the doors manually if the central locking
fails to work
Locking the doors manually if the central lock-
ing fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
ks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
g periods of non-use
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
gage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Luggage compartment liner . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Retaining strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Side storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Ski bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
See also Loading the luggage compartment 16
gage compartment cover
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
n beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 123
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 317 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Leaving home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Heated
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Ignition key
Safety interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Indicator lamps
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Indicator lamps - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Instruments
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 120
Interior lights
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Interior mirror
With manual anti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . . 131
Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Intermittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 259
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Air conditioner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Settings for the driver seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
L Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 120
Lights
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Dipped beam headlights faulty . . . . . . . . . . 82
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . 121
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Loa
Loa
Loc
Loc
Lon
Lug
Lug
M Mai
Index318
ucts for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 214
tz clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
ator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
o display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
sensor faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ing lights
ront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
ear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
side window sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
view mirrors
nti-dazzle interior mirror with automatic
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
nti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
terior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
window sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
window wash/wipe
utomatic rear window wash/wipe . . . . . . 130
window wiper
utomatic rear window wash/wipe . . . . . . 130
termittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
elling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 318 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Maintenance
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Manual operation
Closing the sunroof manually . . . . . . . . . . 114
Mirrors
Activating stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Automatic exterior mirror adjustment . . . . 138
Heated exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . 224
multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Driving with multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
N Net partition
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
O Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Oil level
Check level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Overview
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
P Paddle levers
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Parking aid
SEAT Parking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
SEAT Parking System plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Passenger
See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . 11, 12
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Photosensor faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 19
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Prod
Q Quar
R Radi
Radi
Rain
Rain
Read
F
R
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
A
A
In
Rear
Rear
A
Rear
A
In
Refu
Index 319
t belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 68
t heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
ts
Electric adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Electric backrest adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Manual adjustment of lumbar support . . . 135
Manual backrest angle adjustment . . . . . . 135
Moving the seat forwards and backwards . 134
Seat height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ctor lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
ice indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
otronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ing position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ing position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 319 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Remote control key
Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Locking and unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . 106
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Re-synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Repairs
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Reverse gear
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Roof rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Run-flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Running in
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
S SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Aspects to take into account . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Safety notes
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Deactivating front passenger airbag . . . . . . 45
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt tensioner
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sea
Sea
Sea
Sele
Serv
Serv
Side
Side
Sitt
Sitt
Ski
Index320
recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
signal lamps
azard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
railer turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
urn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 90, 245
oss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
repair kit
yre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
and wheels
imensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 245
rbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
cle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
cle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
cle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
cle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 320 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Automatic close function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Emergency activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 300
Solar sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Solar-powered blower/sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Spare keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Spare wheel
Steel rim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 82
Speed warning function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Steering
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Manual steering wheel adjustment . . . . . . 172
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Switches in the driver door
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Symbols
Red symbols in central display . . . . . . . . . . 77
Yellow symbols in central display . . . . . . . . 79
T Tailgate
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
TCS
How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 20
The environment
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Warming up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 300
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 189
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Tow starting
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 294
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Notes on towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 204
Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Towing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Traction control system
How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Trip
Turn
H
T
T
Turn
Tyre
Tyre
Tyre
L
Tyre
Tyre
Tyre
Tyre
T
Tyres
D
Tyres
Tyres
Tyres
U Unde
V Vehi
Vehi
Vehi
Vehi
Index 321
ExeoST_EN.book Seite 321 Freitag, 3. September 2010 11:41 11
Vehicle Maintenance
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Vehicle paintwork
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 214
Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
W Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Warning lamps
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Electronic Stability Programme . . . . . . . . . . 68
Engine management (EPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . 66
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Red symbols in central display . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Yellow symbols in central display . . . . . . . . 79
Warning lamps - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 216
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Wearing suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 300
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 28
Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
13
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 19, 28
Windows
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Changing the rear wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . 239
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Winter
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Winter conditions
Defrost function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Winter operation
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Wiper and washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omis- sion, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.10
Vehicle data
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1. Vehicle identification number
2. Identification numbers
Type/Model/Engine
Gearbox/Finishes
3. Identification letters
Engine/Gearbox/Paintwork
Equipment
4. Identification codes of variable equipment
5. Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) urban
Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) motorway
Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) mixed
Note
We recommend that you visit an Authorised SEAT Service Centre when- ever you require any work done on your vehicle.
SEAT regularly communicates to its Authorised Service Centres new product developments. They have tools and highly specialized person- nel who can guarantee the safety and performance of your vehicle.
Scrupulously following the General Programme for Inspection Services in Authorised SEAT Service Centres will ensure you maintain greater value for your vehicle.
Portada PM_interior.qxd:Interior Manual TOLEDO 26/7/10 15:57 Pgina 3
EX EO
S T
O W
N ER
S M
A N
U A
L
In gl
s 3
R9 01
20 03
A M
<Related manuals for Seat Exeo ST 2010 Owner’s Manual
en
en
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Exeo ST Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Exeo ST 2010 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Exeo ST as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Exeo ST. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Seat Exeo ST 2010 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Seat Exeo ST 2010 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Seat Exeo ST 2010 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Seat Exeo ST 2010 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Exeo ST 2010 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.